Page 1 ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide For the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 Cisco IOS Release 12.1(26)EB Corporate Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387)
Page 2 OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. CCSP, CCVP, the Cisco Square Bridge logo, Follow Me Browsing, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar, Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Cisco.com xxxv Ordering Documentation xxxvi Documentation Feedback xxxvi Obtaining Technical Assistance xxxvi Cisco Technical Support Website xxxvi Submitting a Service Request xxxvii Definitions of Service Request Severity xxxvii Obtaining Additional Publications and Information xxxvii Product Overview C H A P T E R...
Page 4 2-15 Controller Configuration Mode 2-15 Redundancy Configuration Mode (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 2-16 Main CPU Configuration Mode (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 2-16 Additional Cisco IOS CLI Features 2-17 About Embedded CiscoView 2-17 Installing and Configuring Embedded CiscoView 2-17 Displaying Embedded CiscoView Information...
Page 5 Contents Configuring the ATM Address Manually Setting the ATM Address Modifying the Physical Layer Configuration of an ATM Interface Configuring the IP Interface Configuring IP Address and Subnet Mask Bits Displaying the IP Address Testing the Ethernet Connection Configuring Network Clocking 3-10 Network Clocking Features 3-10...
Page 6 Configuring Terminal Lines and Modem Support (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Configuring Terminal Lines and Modem Support (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Configuring Alias Configuring Buffers Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol Configuring Enable Passwords Configuring Load Statistics Interval Configuring Logging Configuring Login Authentication...
Page 7 Contents Configuring RADIUS Server Communication 4-18 Configuring Secure Shell 4-19 Displaying and Disconnecting SSH 4-22 Testing the System Management Functions 4-23 Displaying Active Processes 4-23 Displaying Protocols 4-23 Displaying Stacks 4-23 Displaying Routes 4-24 Displaying Environment 4-24 Checking Basic Connectivity (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 4-24 Checking Basic Connectivity (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) 4-24...
Page 8 Contents Configuring NNI Interfaces Displaying the NNI Interface Configuration Configuring a 12-Bit VPI NNI Interface (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Displaying the 12-Bit VPI NNI Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Configuring IISP Interfaces Displaying the IISP Configuration Configuring Virtual Connections C H A P T E R Characteristics and Types of Virtual Connections Configuring Virtual Channel Connections Displaying VCCs...
Page 9 Contents Configuring a Soft PVP with Priority 7-35 Configuring a Soft PVC with Priority for a CES Circuit 7-35 Configuring a Soft PVC with Priority for Frame Relay Connections 7-35 Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections 7-38 Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC Connections 7-39 Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVP Connections 7-40...
Page 10 Contents Displaying the Shaped VP Tunnel Configuration 7-83 Configuring a Hierarchical VP Tunnel for Multiple Service Categories 7-83 Enabling Hierarchical Mode 7-84 Displaying the Hierarchical VP Tunnel Configuration 7-85 Configuring an End-Point PVC to a PVP Tunnel 7-86 Displaying PVCs 7-87 Configuring Signalling VPCI for VP Tunnels 7-87...
Page 11 Contents Configuring OAM for the Entire Switch (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Configuring the Interface-Level OAM Checking the ATM Connection (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Checking the ATM Connection (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Displaying the OAM Configuration Configuring Resource Management C H A P T E R Resource Management Functions Switch Fabric Functionality (Catalyst 8540 MSR)
Page 12 Contents Displaying the Output Threshold Maximum Configuration (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) 9-20 Configuring Interface Output Pacing 9-21 Displaying the Output Pacing Configuration 9-22 Configuring Controlled Link Sharing 9-22 Displaying the Controlled Link Sharing Configuration 9-23 Configuring the Scheduler and Service Class 9-24 Displaying the Interface Service Class Information 9-25...
Page 13 Contents Configuring ATM Address Groups 10-8 Displaying ATM Address Group Configuration 10-9 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI 11-1 C H A P T E R Overview 11-1 ATM Addresses 11-2 IISP Configuration 11-2 Configuring the Routing Mode 11-2 Displaying the ATM Routing Mode Configuration 11-3 Configuring the ATM Address 11-4...
Page 14 Contents Configuring Transit Restriction 11-41 Configuring Redistribution 11-42 Configuring Aggregation Token 11-43 Configuring Aggregation Mode 11-45 Configuring Significant Change Thresholds 11-46 Configuring the Complex Node Representation for LGNs 11-48 Tuning Protocol Parameters 11-49 Configuring PNNI Hello, Database Synchronization, and Flooding Parameters 11-49 Configuring the Resource Management Poll Interval 11-51...
Page 15 Contents Examples of Configuring Extended IP Access Lists 12-12 Configuring Per-Interface Address Registration with Optional Access Filters 12-13 Displaying the ILMI Access Filter Configuration 12-14 Configuring IP over ATM 13-1 C H A P T E R Configuring Classical IP over ATM 13-1 Configuring Classical IP over ATM in an SVC Environment 13-1...
Page 16 Contents Setting Up the Server, BUS, and a Client on a Subinterface 14-12 Setting Up a Client on a Subinterface 14-12 Configuring a LAN Emulation Client on the ATM Switch Router 14-13 Configuring an Ethernet LANE Client 14-14 Configuring Fault-Tolerant Operation 14-15 Enabling Redundant LECSs and LES/BUSs 14-15...
Page 17 Contents Displaying SNMP Server ATM Accounting Configuration 15-11 Using TFTP to Copy the ATM Accounting File 15-12 Configuring Remote Logging of ATM Accounting Records 15-13 Displaying the Remote Logging Configuration 15-13 Configuring ATM RMON 15-14 RMON Overview 15-14 Configuring Port Select Groups 15-15 Displaying the ATM RMON Port Select Group 15-16...
Page 18 Contents Displaying the TDP Control Channels 16-9 Configuring Tag Switching on VP Tunnels 16-9 Displaying the VP Tunnel Configuration 16-11 Connecting the VP Tunnels 16-11 Displaying the VP Tunnel Configuration 16-12 Configuring VC Merge 16-12 Displaying the VC Merge Configuration 16-12 Configuring Tag Switching CoS 16-13...
Page 19 Contents Displaying the Interface Signalling IE Forwarding Configuration 17-2 Configuring ATM SVC Frame Discard 17-3 Displaying the ATM Frame Discard Configuration 17-4 Configuring E.164 Addresses 17-4 E.164 Conversion Methods 17-5 Configuring E.164 Gateway 17-5 Configuring an E.164 Address Static Route 17-6 Displaying the E.164 Static Route Configuration 17-6...
Page 20 Contents Manual 622-Mbps Interface Configuration 18-8 Configuring OC-12c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 18-9 OC-12c Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 18-9 Default OC-12c ATM Interface Configuration without Autoconfiguration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 18-9 Manual OC-12c Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 18-10 Configuring OC-48c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 18-11...
Page 21 Contents Overview of Structured Circuit Emulation Services 19-18 Configuring Network Clocking for Structured CES 19-19 Configuring a Hard PVC for Structured CES 19-19 Verifying a Hard PVC for Structured CES 19-22 Configuring a Hard PVC for Structured CES with a Shaped VP Tunnel 19-23 Phase 1—Configuring a Shaped VP Tunnel 19-23...
Page 22 Contents Configuring SGCP Request Handling 19-60 Configuring Call-Agent Address 19-60 Shutting Down SGCP 19-61 Configuring Explicit Paths on CES VCs 19-61 Configuring CES VC Explicit Paths 19-62 Displaying CES VC Explicit Path Configuration 19-63 Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections 19-63 Guidelines for Creating Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVCs 19-64...
Page 23 Contents Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Functions 20-9 Enabling Frame Relay Encapsulation on an Interface 20-9 Displaying Frame Relay Encapsulation 20-10 Configuring Frame Relay Serial Interface Type 20-10 Displaying Frame Relay Interface Configuration 20-11 Configuring Frame Relay Frame Size for Frame Relay to ATM Interworking 20-11 Configuring and Using Frame Relay Frame Size 20-12...
Page 24 Contents Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Service Interworking Soft PVCs 20-37 Display Frame Relay Interworking Soft PVCs 20-39 Modifying CTTR Indexes on an Existing Frame Relay Soft PVC 20-39 Standard Signalling for Frame Relay Soft PVCs 20-40 Configuring the Soft PVC Route Optimization Feature 20-40 Configuring a Frame Relay Interface with Route Optimization 20-41...
Page 25 Contents Configuring IMA Group Frame Length 21-16 Displaying the IMA Group Frame Length Configuration 21-17 Configuring IMA Group Test Pattern 21-17 Displaying the IMA Group Test Pattern Configuration 21-18 Configuring Quality of Service 22-1 C H A P T E R About Quality of Service 22-1 Best-Effort Service...
Page 26 Contents Configuring Buffer-Groups 22-21 Attaching a Service Policy to an Interface 22-21 TCAM Region for IP QoS 22-22 Verifying the IP QoS Configuration 22-22 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module 23-1 C H A P T E R About the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module 23-1 ATM TSCAM Features 23-2...
Page 27 Contents Catalyst 8540 MSR ATM Router Module Software Restrictions 25-7 Catalyst 8510 MSR ATM Router Module Software Restrictions 25-8 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces 25-9 Default ATM Router Module Interface Configuration Without Autoconfiguration 25-10 Configuring LECs on ATM Router Module Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 25-10 LEC Configuration Examples 25-11...
Page 28 25-50 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images 26-1 C H A P T E R Configuring a Static IP Route 26-1 Understanding the Cisco IOS File System 26-2 File Systems and Memory Devices 26-3 File System Tasks 26-3...
Page 29 Contents Switch T3 Initial Configuration Switch T4 Initial Configuration Switch T5 Initial Configuration Configuring Second Level of PNNI Hierarchy on Switches T3 and T4 Configuring the Link Between Switch T3 and Switch T4 for PNNI Verifying Connectivity to All ATM Addresses and Deleting an Old Static Route on Switches T4 and T3 Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy Switch T1 Initial Configuration...
Page 30 Contents ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide OL-7396-01...
Page 31: New And Changed Information
Preface This preface describes the audience, organization, and conventions for the ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide, and provides information on how to obtain related documentation. Audience This publication is intended for experienced network administrators who are responsible for configuring and maintaining the Layer 3 enabled ATM switch router.
Page 32 Organization Organization The major sections of this guide are as follows: Chapter Title Description Chapter 1 Product Overview Provides an overview of the ATM switch router features and functions. Chapter 2 Understanding the User Describes how to access the commands available in Interface each command mode and explains the primary uses for each command mode.
Page 33: Related Documentation
Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide and Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference publications. The ATM switch router documentation set is primarily ATM-specific. You might be referred to the Cisco IOS documentation set for information about IP and router configuration and other non-ATM related features.
Page 34: Document Conventions
Advanced configuration documents are not provided in the accessory kit unless specifically ordered. • They are available on Cisco.com and the Documentation CD-ROM and offer configuration information for more advanced applications of the ATM switch router. The ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide is one of the advanced configuration documents and should only be used after you have completed the processes described in the basic document set.
Page 35: Obtaining Documentation
Obtaining Documentation Cisco documentation and additional literature are available on Cisco.com. Cisco also provides several ways to obtain technical assistance and other technical resources. These sections explain how to obtain technical information from Cisco Systems.
Page 36: Ordering Documentation
Access to all tools on the Cisco Technical Support Website requires a Cisco.com user ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a user ID or password, you can register at this URL: http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do...
Page 37: Submitting A Service Request
URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/servicerequest For S1 or S2 service requests or if you do not have Internet access, contact the Cisco TAC by telephone. (S1 or S2 service requests are those in which your production network is down or severely degraded.) Cisco TAC engineers are assigned immediately to S1 and S2 service requests to help keep your business operations running smoothly.
Page 38 Obtaining Additional Publications and Information The Cisco Product Catalog describes the networking products offered by Cisco Systems, as well as • ordering and customer support services. Access the Cisco Product Catalog at this URL: http://cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/pcat/ Cisco Press publishes a wide range of general networking, training and certification titles. Both new •...
Page 39: Layer 3 Enabled Atm Switch Router Hardware Overview
C H A P T E R Product Overview This chapter provides an introduction to the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers. This chapter provides hardware and software information for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 40: Chapter 1 Product Overview
Chapter 1 Product Overview Layer 3 Enabled ATM Switch Router Hardware Overview Available Hardware Components (Catalyst 8540 MSR) The Catalyst 8540 MSR features the following available hardware components: Optional switch feature card, supporting usage parameter control (UPC) and statistics • •...
Page 41: Layer 3 Enabled Atm Switch Router Hardware (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 1 Product Overview Layer 3 Enabled ATM Switch Router Hardware Overview Layer 3 Enabled ATM Switch Router Hardware (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) The Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers both use a five-slot, modular chassis featuring the option of dual, fault-tolerant, load-sharing AC or DC power supplies.
Page 42: Available Physical Interfaces (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 1 Product Overview Layer 3 Enabled ATM Switch Router Hardware Overview Table 1-1 FC-PCQ and FC-PFQ Feature Comparison (continued) Feature FC-PCQ FC-PFQ Intelligent tail (partial) Supported Supported packet discard Selective cell marking Multiple fixed thresholds Multiple, weighted, dynamic and discard thresholds Shaping Per-port (pacing)
Page 43: Summary Of Software Features
Chapter 1 Product Overview Summary of Software Features Full-width ATM router modules • Full-width 8-port Gigabit Ethernet interface modules • Full-width 1-port Gigabit Ethernet interface modules • Summary of Software Features The following sections provide a brief overview of the software features of the Layer 3 enabled ATM switch router, including the following features: •...
Page 44: Atm Addressing And Plug-And-Play Operation
Chapter 1 Product Overview Summary of Software Features ATM Addressing and Plug-and-Play Operation The ATM switch router provides the following self-configuring features: Preconfigured ATM address prefixes and MAC address, permitting small-scale ATM internetworks • to be deployed prior to obtaining officially-allocated ATM addresses Automatic reassignment of addresses when reconfiguration is necessary •...
Page 45: Resource Management
Chapter 1 Product Overview Summary of Software Features Resource Management Resource management provides support for the following features: Traffic categories: • Constant bit rate (CBR) – Real-time variable bit rate (VBR-RT) – Non-real time variable bit rate (VBR-NRT) – Available bit rate (ABR) + minimum cell rate (MCR) –...
Page 46: Atm Internetworking Services (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
LAN emulation configuration server (LECS), LAN emulation server (LES), and • broadcast-and-unknown server (BUS) for Ethernet emulated LANs (ELANs) Cisco Simple Server Redundancy Protocol (SSRP) for LANE • RFC 1577 classical IP over ATM and Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) server and client •...
Page 47: Available Network Management Applications
Chapter 1 Product Overview Summary of Software Features Update hardware controller microcode independently of system image on channelized • E1 port adapter In-band device network management using IP over ATM • In-band device network management using LAN emulation client, RFC 1577 client, and RFC 1483 •...
Page 48: Layer 3 Features
Chapter 1 Product Overview Summary of Software Features Layer 3 Features With the ATM router module, the ATM switch router support the following Layer 3 features: Bridging • Integrated routing and bridging (IRB) • IP fragmentation support • IP multicast routing •...
Page 49: Chapter 2 Understanding The User Interface
The user interface for the ATM switch router provides access to several different command modes, each with related commands. Users familiar with the Cisco IOS user interface will find the interfaces very similar. This chapter describes how to access and list the commands available in each command mode, and explains the primary uses for each command mode.
Page 50: Accessing Each Command Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode You can enter commands in uppercase, lowercase, or a mix of both. Only passwords are case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and keywords to a minimum unique string of characters. For example, you can abbreviate the show command to sh.
Page 51 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Table 2-1 Summary of Command Modes (continued) Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method Interface range From global configuration To exit to global Switch(config-if)# configuration mode, specify a range of configuration mode, use the interfaces to configure with an exit command.
Page 52 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Table 2-1 Summary of Command Modes (continued) Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method PNNI node configuration From ATM router To exit to ATM router Switch(config-pnni-node)# configuration mode, configure configuration mode, use the the PNNI routing node with exit command.
Page 53: Exec Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Table 2-1 Summary of Command Modes (continued) Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method ATM signalling From global configuration To exit to global Switch(cfg-atmsig-diag)# diagnostics configuration mode, enter the configuration mode, use the atm signalling diagnostics exit command.
Page 54: Privileged Exec Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode The privileged EXEC command set includes all user-level EXEC mode commands and the configure command, through which you can access global configuration mode and the remaining configuration submodes.
Page 55: Interface Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode You can specify either the terminal, nonvolatile memory (NVRAM), or a file stored on a network server as the source of configuration commands. For more information, see Chapter 26, “Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images.”...
Page 56: Interface Range Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Table 2-3 Interface Addressing Formats (Catalyst 8540) (continued) Slot Addressing Format card/subcard/port atm0 or ethernet0 atm-sec0 or ethernet-sec0 card/subcard/port card/subcard/port card/subcard/port card/subcard/port The following example shows how to enter interface configuration mode to configure the Ethernet interface on the CPU: Switch(config)# interface ethernet0 Switch(config-if)#...
Page 57: Subinterface Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode To exit interface range configuration mode and return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command or press Ctrl-Z: Switch(config-if)# end Switch# Subinterface Configuration Mode Subinterface configuration mode allows access to commands that affect logical interfaces, also called subinterfaces.
Page 58: Line Configuration Mode (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Line Configuration Mode (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Line configuration mode on the Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010 ATM switch router provides access to commands that modify the operation of individual terminal lines. These commands are used to configure the console, auxiliary, and vty connections, set up modem connections, and so on.
Page 59: Map-Class Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Map-Class Configuration Mode Map-class configuration mode provides access to command used to define the traffic parameters when specifying a request for a switched virtual channel (SVC). To enter map-class configuration mode from global configuration mode, enter the map-class command followed by a class name to configure;...
Page 60: Pnni Node Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode PNNI Node Configuration Mode The PNNI node configuration mode is a submode of ATM router configuration mode and provides access to commands you use to configure PNNI nodes on the ATM switch router. To enter PNNI node configuration mode from ATM router configuration mode, use the node command followed by a node index;...
Page 61: Atm Accounting File Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode ATM Accounting File Configuration Mode ATM accounting file configuration mode provides access to commands used to configure a file for accounting and billing of virtual circuits (VCs). To enter ATM accounting file configuration mode from global configuration mode, use the atm accounting file command followed by an accounting filename;...
Page 62: Lane Configuration Server Database Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode To exit ATM accounting selection configuration mode and return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command or press Ctrl-Z: Switch(config-acct-sel)# end Switch# For detailed information on configuring ATM accounting selections, see Chapter 15, “Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP.”...
Page 63: Atm Signalling Diagnostics Configuration Mode
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode To exit ATM E.164 translation table configuration mode and return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command or press Ctrl-Z: Switch(config-atm-e164)# end Switch# For detailed information on configuring E.164 addresses, see the Configuring E.164 Addresses section Chapter 17, “Configuring Signalling Features.”...
Page 64: Redundancy Configuration Mode (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface Accessing Each Command Mode Redundancy Configuration Mode (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Redundancy configuration mode provides access to commands used to configure system redundancy and EHSA operation. To enter redundancy configuration mode from global configuration mode, use the redundancy command;...
Page 65: Additional Cisco Ios Cli Features
Additional Cisco IOS CLI Features Additional Cisco IOS CLI Features Because the ATM switch router’s operating system is based on Cisco IOS software, its interface provides a number of features that help you use the CLI with greater flexibility, ease, and power. These features includes the following: Context-sensitive help—allows you to obtain a list of commands available for each command mode...
Page 66 Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-1.0_ace.html? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-1.0_error.html? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-1.0_jks.jar? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-1.0_nos.jar? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/applet.html? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/cisco.x509? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/identitydb.obj? [confirm] Switch# squeeze slot0: All deleted files will be removed. Continue? [confirm] Squeeze operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm] Squeeze of slot0 complete Switch# archive tar /xtract tftp://20.1.1.1/ciscoview.tar slot0:cv...
Page 67 Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-4.0_ace.html? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-4.0_error.html? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-4.0_jks.jar? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/Cat8500-4.0_nos.jar? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/applet.html? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/cisco.x509? [confirm] Delete slot0:cv/identitydb.obj? [confirm] Switch# squeeze sec-slot0: All deleted files will be removed. Continue? [confirm] Squeeze operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm] Squeeze of sec-slot0 complete Switch# archive tar /xtract tftp://20.1.1.1/ciscoview.tar slot0:cv...
Page 68: Displaying Embedded Ciscoview Information
SIZE(in bytes) ------------------------------------------------ Cat8500-4.0.sgz 1930848 Cat8500-4.0_ace.html 3704 Cat8500-4.0_error.html Cat8500-4.0_jks.jar 15312 Cat8500-4.0_nos.jar 15936 cisco.x509 identitydb.obj 2523 applet.html 8039 8510MSR# show ciscoview version Engine Version: 5.3 ADP Device: Cat8500 ADP Version: 4.0 ADK: 38 ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 2-20 OL-7396-01...
Page 69 C H A P T E R Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router This chapter discusses specific steps used to initially configure the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers. For conceptual and background information, refer to the Guide to ATM Technology.
Page 70: Methods For Configuring The Atm Switch Router
If you want to configure a new ATM address for the switch (an autoconfigured ATM address is • assigned by Cisco), you need an ATM address assigned by your system administrator. If you are not using BOOTP, you need an IP address and a netmask address.
Page 71: Verifying Software And Hardware Installed On The Atm Switch Router
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) PNNI Software (cat8540m-WP-M), Version 12.0(4a)W5(10.44), INTERIM TEST SOFTWARE Copyright (c) 1986-1999 by cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Tue 17-Aug-99 03:18 by Image text-base: 0x60010930, data-base: 0x60936000 CUBI Driver subsystem initializing ... primary interrupt reg read FFC00...
Page 72: Configuring The Bootp Server
Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring the BOOTP Server IDPROM in slot 0 not properly programmed cisco C8540MSR (R5000) processor with 262144K bytes of memory. R5000 processor, Implementation 35, Revision 2.1 (512KB Level 2 Cache) Last reset from power-on 3 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
Page 73: Configuring The Atm Address
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring the ATM Address Example The following example BOOTP configuration file shows the added entry: # /etc/bootptab: database for bootp server (/etc/bootpd) # Blank lines and lines beginning with '#' are ignored. # Legend: first field -- hostname (may be full domain name and probably should be)
Page 74: Manually Setting The Atm Address
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Modifying the Physical Layer Configuration of an ATM Interface Manually Setting the ATM Address To configure a new ATM address that replaces the previous ATM address when running IISP software only, see Chapter 11, “Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI.”.
Page 75: Configuring The Ip Interface
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring the IP Interface To display the physical interface configuration, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show controllers atm card/subcard/port Shows the physical layer configuration. more system:running-config Shows the physical layer scrambling configuration.
Page 76: Configuring Ip Address And Subnet Mask Bits
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring the IP Interface These IP connections are used only for network management. Note To configure the switch to communicate via the Ethernet interface, provide the IP address and subnet mask bits for the interface. This section includes the following: Configuring IP Address and Subnet Mask Bits, page 3-8 •...
Page 77: Testing The Ethernet Connection
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring the IP Interface Examples The following example shows how to use the show interfaces command to display the IP address of interface ethernet 0: Switch# show interfaces ethernet 0 Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is SonicT, address is 0040.0b0a.1080 (bia 0040.0b0a.1080) Internet address is 172.20.40.93/24 <information deleted>...
Page 78: Configuring Network Clocking
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking Configuring Network Clocking This section describes network clocking configuration of the ATM switch router. Properly synchronized network clocking is important in the transmission of constant bit rate (CBR) and variable bit rate real time (VBR-RT) data.
Page 79: Configuring Network Clock Sources And Priorities (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking Systems equipped with the network clock module can derive clocking from a Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) source. To specify the line type attached to the BITS ports on the network clock module and to assign a priority to a port, use the following commands in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 80: Configuring The Transmit Clocking Source
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking Configuring the Transmit Clocking Source To configure where each interface receives its transmit clocking, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured.
Page 81: Configuring Network Clocking With Ncdp
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking The following example shows the switch clock source configuration with the network clock module installed: Switch# show network-clocks Network clocking information: --------------------------------------- Source switchover mode: revertive Netclkd state: Active Source selection method: provisioned NCLKM hardware status:...
Page 82: Ncdp Network Example
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking NCDP Network Example Figure 3-1 shows a network of six ATM switch routers with clocking derived from a stratum 3 PRS. Node A is configured to receive priority 1 clocking on two of its ports, while node B is configured to receive priority 2 clocking on one of its ports.
Page 83: Enabling Ncdp
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking Enabling NCDP To enable NCDP, use the following global configuration command for each node that you want to configure for NCDP: Command Purpose ncdp Enables NCDP. Configuring Network Clock Sources and Priorities You must specify the clocking sources, their priorities, and associated stratums used by NCDP in constructing the clock distribution tree.
Page 84: Configuring Optional Ncdp Per-Interface Parameters
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking When you specify a maximum diameter, you constrain the diameter of the spanning tree by specifying the maximum number of hops between any two nodes that participate in the protocol. Each node must be configured with the same maximum network diameter value for NCDP to operate correctly.
Page 85: Displaying The Ncdp Configuration
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Clocking Displaying the NCDP Configuration To display the NCDP configuration, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ncdp path root Displays the NCDP clock path from the switch to the root source.
Page 86: Network Clock Services For Ces Operations And Cbr Traffic
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Network Routing Network Clock Services for CES Operations and CBR Traffic Circuit emulation services-interworking functions (CES-IWF) and constant bit rate (CBR) traffic relate to a quality of service (QoS) classification defined by the ATM Forum for Class A (ATM adaptation layer 1 [AAL1]) traffic in ATM networks.
Page 87: Configuring System Information
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring System Information Configuring System Information Although not required, the system clock and hostname should be set as part of the initial system configuration. To set these system parameters, perform the following steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose...
Page 88: Oir Test (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Online Diagnostics (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Feature cards • Carrier modules • ATM port adapters • ATM and Layer 3 interface modules • ATM router modules • When the access test detects a hardware failure, the system issues an error message to the console. If the access test detects a hardware problem with an active switch processor, the standby switch processor, if it is present, automatically takes over and becomes an active switch processor.
Page 89: Configuring Online Diagnostics (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Online Diagnostics (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Configuring Online Diagnostics (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To configure online diagnostics, use the following global configuration commands: Command Purpose diag online Enables all of the online diagnostic tests. diag online access Enables only the access diagnostic test.
Page 90 Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring Online Diagnostics (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Examples The following example shows how to display detailed access test configuration and results: Switch# show diag online details access ======== Online Access Test Details ======== Current Test Status : Test is Enabled Current Frequency of Access Test : 20 seconds Slot Card-Type...
Page 91: Configuring Snmp And Rmon
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Configuring SNMP and RMON The following example shows how to display the details and status of the snake test: 8540MSR#show diag online snake ======== Online Snake Test Status and Details ======== -------- Test Status -------- Current Test Status : Test is Enabled...
Page 92: Testing The Configuration
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Testing the Configuration The following sections describe tasks you can perform to confirm the hardware, software, and interface configuration: Confirming the Hardware Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR), page 3-25 • Confirming the Hardware Configuration (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010), page 3-25 •...
Page 93: Confirming The Hardware Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Confirming the Hardware Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Use the show hardware and show capability commands to confirm the correct hardware installation: Switch# show hardware C8540 named Switch, Date: 08:36:44 UTC Fri May 21 1999 Slot Ctrlr-Type Part No.
Page 94: Confirming The Software Version
Switch uptime is 1 hour, 1 minute System restarted by reload System image file is "tftp://cat8540m-wp-mz_nimmu" cisco C8540MSR (R5000) processor with 65536K/256K bytes of memory. R5000 processor, Implementation 35, Revision 2.1 (512KB Level 2 Cache) Last reset from power-on 1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) 8 ATM network interface(s) 507K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
Page 95 Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Example (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) The following example displays the power-on diagnostic tests results for the Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010: NewLs1010# show diag power-on LS1010 Power-on Diagnostics Status (.=Pass,F=Fail,U=Unknown,N=Not Applicable) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Last Power-on Diags Date: 99/07/09...
Page 96: Confirming The Ethernet Configuration
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Confirming the Ethernet Configuration Use the show interfaces command to confirm that the Ethernet interface on the route processor is configured correctly: Switch# show interfaces ethernet 0 Ethernet0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is SonicT, address is 0000.0000.0000 (bia 0000.0000.0000) Internet address is 172.20.52.20/26 MTU 1500 bytes, BW 10000 Kbit, DLY 1000 usec, rely 255/255, load 1/255...
Page 97: Testing The Ethernet Connection
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Testing the Ethernet Connection After you have configured the IP address(es) for the Ethernet interface, test for connectivity between the switch and a host. The host can reside anywhere in your network. To test for Ethernet connectivity, use the following user EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 98: Confirming The Atm Interface Configuration
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Confirming the ATM Interface Configuration Use the show atm interface command to confirm the ATM interfaces are configured correctly: Switch# show atm interface atm 1/0/0 Interface: ATM1/0/0 Port-type: oc3suni IF Status: Admin Status: Auto-config:...
Page 99: Confirming Virtual Channel Connections
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Confirming Virtual Channel Connections Use the show atm vc command to confirm the status of ATM virtual channel connections: Switch# show atm vc Interface Type X-Interface X-VPI X-VCI Encap Status ATM1/1/0 ATM0 QSAAL...
Page 100: Confirming The Running Configuration
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Cross-connect OAM-state: Not-applicable Encapsulation: AAL5ILMI Threshold Group: 6, Cells queued: 0 Rx cells: 0, Tx cells: 0 Tx Clp0:0, Tx Clp1: 0 Rx Clp0:0, Rx Clp1: 0 Rx Upc Violations:0, Rx cell drops:0 Rx pkts:0, Rx pkt drops:0 Rx connection-traffic-table-index: 3 Rx service-category: VBR-RT (Realtime Variable Bit Rate)
Page 101: Confirming The Saved Configuration
Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration Confirming the Saved Configuration Use the more nvram:startup-config command to confirm that the configuration saved in NVRAM is correct: Switch# more nvram:startup-config version XX.X no service pad no service password-encryption hostname Switch <information deleted>...
Page 102 Chapter 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router Testing the Configuration ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 3-34 OL-7396-01...
Page 103: System Management Tasks
C H A P T E R Configuring System Management Functions This chapter describes the basic tasks for configuring general system features, such as access control and basic switch management. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 104: C H A P T E R 4 Configuring System Management Functions
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions System Management Tasks You can connect a modem to the console port. The following settings on the modem are required: Enable auto answer mode • Suppress result codes • You can configure your modem by setting the dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the modem or by connecting the modem to terminal equipment.
Page 105: Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions System Management Tasks Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol To specify how often your ATM switch router sends Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) updates, perform the following tasks in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# cdp holdtime seconds Specifies the hold time in seconds, to be sent in packets.
Page 106: Configuring Enable Passwords
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions System Management Tasks Configuring Enable Passwords To log on to the ATM switch router at a specified level, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose enable level Enables login. To configure the enable password for a given level, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose enable password [level number]...
Page 107: Configuring Login Authentication
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions System Management Tasks Command Purpose logging monitor level Limits messages logged to the terminal lines (monitors) based on severity, use the logging monitor global configuration command. This command limits the logging messages displayed on terminal lines other than the console line to messages with a level at or above level.
Page 108: Configuring Scheduler Attributes
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions System Management Tasks Configuring Scheduler Attributes To control the maximum amount of time that can elapse without running the lowest-priority system processes, use the following global configuration commands: Command Purpose scheduler allocate msecs Configures the guaranteed CPU time for processes, in milliseconds.
Page 109: Configuring Snmp
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions System Management Tasks Command Purpose service telnet-zero-idle Sets the TCP window to zero (0) when the Telnet connection is idle. service timestamps Displays timestamp debug/log messages. service udp-small-servers Enables small UDP servers (for example, ECHO). Configuring SNMP This section describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Management Information Bases (MIBs) commands used to configure SNMP on your ATM switch router.
Page 110: Username Commands
Configures username-based authentication system at login with an additional command to be added. username name nohangup Configures username-based authentication system at login and prevents Cisco IOS from disconnecting after the automatic command is completed. username name noescape Configures username-based authentication system at login but prevents the user from issuing an escape character on the switch.
Page 111: Configuring The Privilege Level
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring the Privilege Level Configuring the Privilege Level This section describes configuring and displaying the privilege level access to the ATM switch router. The access privileges can be configured at the global level or at the line level for a specific line. Configuring Privilege Level (Global) To set the privilege level for a command, use the following global configuration command: Command...
Page 112: Configuring The Network Time Protocol
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring the Network Time Protocol Configuring the Network Time Protocol This section describes configuring the Network Time Protocol (NTP) on the ATM switch router. To control access to the system NTP services, use the following ntp global configuration commands. To remove access control to the system’s NTP services, use the no ntp command.
Page 113 Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring the Network Time Protocol Caution Do not enter the ntp clock-period command; it is documented for informational purposes only. The system automatically generates this command as NTP determines the clock error and compensates. To prevent an interface from receiving NTP packets, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command...
Page 114: Displaying The Ntp Configuration
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring the Network Time Protocol To authenticate the identity of a system to which NTP will synchronize, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose ntp trusted-key key-number Configures an NTP synchronize number. To periodically update the ATM switch router calendar from NTP, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose...
Page 115: Configuring The Clock And Calendar
If no other source of time is available, you can manually configure the current time and date after the system is restarted. The time will remain accurate until the next system restart. Cisco recommends that you use manual configuration only as a last resort.
Page 116: Configuring The Calendar
TACACS server running on a workstation. You must have access to and configure a TACACS server before configuring the TACACS features described in this publication on your Cisco device. Cisco’s basic TACACS support is modeled after the original Defense Data Network (DDN) application.
Page 117: Configuring Aaa Access Control With Tacacs
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring TACACS Table 4-1 TACACS Command Comparison (continued) Extended Command TACACS TACACS TACACS+ aaa authentication local override aaa authentication ppp aaa authorization aaa new-model arap authentication arap use-tacacs enable last-resort enable use-tacacs login authentication login tacacs ppp authentication ppp use-tacacs...
Page 118: Configuring Aaa Accounting
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring RADIUS Configuring AAA Accounting To enable the AAA accounting of requested services for billing or security purposes when using TACACS+, perform the following steps in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# aaa accounting system Performs accounting for all system-level events not associated with users, such as reloads.
Page 119: Configuring Radius Authentication
Configuring named method lists • Configuring authorization attribute-value pairs • Configuring RADIUS Servers Refer to the “Configuring RADIUS” chapter in the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide for details on RADIUS server configuration tasks such as the following: • Configuring vendor-specific RADIUS attributes •...
Page 120: Configuring Radius Server Communication
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring RADIUS Configuring RADIUS Server Communication To configure per-server RADIUS server communication on the switch, use the following global configuration commands: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# aaa new-model Enables the AAA access control model. Step 2 Switch(config)# radius-server host {hostname | Specifies the host name or IP address of the...
Page 121: Configuring Secure Shell
Berkeley rexec and rsh tools. Two versions of SSH are currently available, Version 1 and Version 2. Both SSH Server Version 1 and Version 2 are implemented in the Cisco IOS software. Also, SSH Version 1 Integrated Client and SSH Version 2 Integrated Client are implemented in the Cisco IOS software.
Page 122 Example The following example shows how to configure the SSH client and start the SSH server: Cat8540(config)# hostname Cat8540 Cat8540(config)# ip domain-name cisco.com Cat8540(config)# crypto key generate rsa The following example shows how to configure SSH server version 2: ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide...
Page 123 [command(command(command...)) 1. (Optional) Specifies the Cisco IOS command that you want to run on the remote networking device. If the remote host is not running Cisco IOS software, this may be any command recognized by the remote host. If the command includes spaces, you must enclose the command in quotation marks.
Page 124: Displaying And Disconnecting Ssh
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Configuring Secure Shell Displaying and Disconnecting SSH To display the SSH utilization, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show ssh Displays SSH connection information. disconnect ssh session-id Disconnects an SSH session. show ip ssh Displays the SSH configuration.
Page 125: Testing The System Management Functions
This information is of use only to Cisco engineers analyzing crashes in the field. It is included here in case you need to read the displayed statistics to an engineer over the phone.
Page 126: Displaying Routes
Chapter 4 Configuring System Management Functions Testing the System Management Functions Displaying Routes To discover the IP routes that the ATM switch router packets will actually take when traveling to their destination, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose traceroute [protocol] [destination] Displays packets through the network.
Page 127: Route Processor Redundant Operation (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
The Catalyst 8540 MSR supports fault tolerance by allowing a secondary route processor to take over if the primary fails. This secondary, or redundant, route processor runs in standby mode. In standby mode, the secondary route processor is partially booted with the Cisco IOS software; however, no configuration is loaded.
Page 128: Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Route Processor Redundant Operation (Catalyst 8540 MSR) When the Catalyst 8540 MSR is powered on, the two route processors go through an arbitration to determine which is the primary route processor and which is the secondary. The following rules apply during arbitration: •...
Page 129: Configuring Route Processor Redundancy (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Route Processor Redundant Operation (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Table 5-1 Connection Preservation During Route Processor Switchover (continued) Connection Type Preserved During Switchover Soft PVC (two-ended) Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Soft PVC Termination on CPU SPVP CES PVC CES SVC CES Soft PVC Frame Relay PVC Frame Relay Soft PVC...
Page 130 Switch# redundancy force-failover main-cpu The following example shows the warning message that appears if you attempt to force a failover between route processors whose Cisco IOS images are significantly different. Switch# redundancy force-failover main-cpu Warning: Attempting to migrate to a different version of system image than the primary.
Page 131: Displaying The Configuration Register Value
Switch uptime is 3 weeks, 5 days, 23 hours, 30 minutes System restarted by bus error at PC 0x6007EF24, address 0xFC System image file is "bootflash:cat8540m-wp-mz.XXX-X.X.WX.X.XX" cisco C8540MSR (R5000) processor with 65536K/256K bytes of memory. R5000 processor, Implementation 35, Revision X.X (512KB Level 2 Cache) Last reset from power-on 1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
Page 132: Immediately Synchronizing Route Processor Configurations (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Synchronizing the Configurations (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Immediately Synchronizing Route Processor Configurations (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To immediately synchronize the configurations used by the two route processors, use the following privileged EXEC command on the primary route processor: Command Purpose redundancy manual-sync {startup-config |...
Page 133: Synchronizing The Dynamic Information (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Synchronizing the Dynamic Information (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Command Purpose Step 4 Switch(config-r-mc)# end Returns to privileged EXEC mode. Switch# Step 5 Switch# copy system:running-config Forces a manual synchronization of the nvram:startup-config configuration files in NVRAM. This step is unnecessary to synchronize Note the running configuration file in DRAM.
Page 134: Configuring Counter Synchronization (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Synchronizing the Dynamic Information (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Command Purpose Step 5 Switch(config-r-mc)# end Returns to privileged EXEC mode. Switch# Step 6 Switch# copy system:running-config Copies the configuration to NVRAM. nvram:startup-config 1. The sync-dynamic info command is enabled by default. Example In the following example, both the running configuration and dynamic information are synchronized: Switch(config)# redundancy...
Page 135: Displaying The Route Processor Redundancy Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Displaying the Route Processor Redundancy Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Example The following example shows how to enable and configure the time interval for interface, VC, and signaling counter updates between the primary and secondary route processors. Switch# configure terminal Switch(config)# redundancy Switch(config-r)# main-cpu...
Page 136: Preparing A Route Processor For Removal (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Preparing a Route Processor for Removal (Catalyst 8540 MSR) 8540MSR# more system:running-config version 12.1 service config no service pad service timestamps debug uptime service timestamps log uptime no service password-encryption hostname 8540MSR logging buffered 4096 debugging no logging console enable password lab spd headroom 1024...
Page 137: Configuring Switch Fabric Enhanced High System Availability Operation (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Configuring Switch Fabric Enhanced High System Availability Operation (Catalyst 8540 MSR) EHSA:Syncing monvars to secondary, : BOOTLDR=[OK] Switch# Switch# redundancy prepare-for-cpu-removal This command will cause this CPU to go to the rom monitor through a forced crash. After this cpu goes to the rom monitor prompt, it is safe to remove it from the chassis Please DO NOT REBOOT this cpu before removing it...
Page 138: Configuring Preferred Switching Processors (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Configuring Switch Fabric Enhanced High System Availability Operation (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Caution Do not hot swap an active switch processor module before putting it in standby mode. Removing an active switch processor breaks active connections and stops the flow of traffic through the switch. Put an active switch in standby mode using the redundancy preferred-switch-card-slots command before removing it from the chassis.
Page 139: Displaying The Switch Processor Ehsa Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Displaying the Switch Processor EHSA Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) SWC SLOT SWC_TYPE SWC_STATUS ================================================= EVEN ACTIVE NOT-PRESENT NOT-PRESENT ACTIVE <information deleted> Displaying the Switch Processor EHSA Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To display the switch processor EHSA configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show capability {primary | secondary}...
Page 140: Storing The Configuration
Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy Storing the Configuration Driver 0 type: 2560 super cam Functional Version 1.3 Driver 1 type: 2562 OC12 SPAM Functional Version 5.1 Driver 2 type: 2564 OC mother board Functional Version 5.1 Driver 3 type: 258 Switch Card Functional Version 1.0 Driver 4 type: 259 Switch Feature Card Functional Version 4.0 Storing the Configuration When autoconfiguration and any manual configurations are complete, you should copy the configuration...
Page 141: Chapter 6 Configuring Atm Network Interfaces
C H A P T E R Configuring ATM Network Interfaces This chapter describes how to explicitly configure ATM network interface types. Explicitly configuring interfaces is the alternative to Integrated Local Management Interface (ILMI) autoconfiguration, which senses the peer interface type and appropriately configures the interface on the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 142: Displaying The Autoconfiguration
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Disabling Autoconfiguration To disable autoconfiguration on an interface, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm Selects the interface to be configured. card/subcard/port[.vpt#] Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# no atm auto-configuration Disables autoconfiguration on the interface.
Page 143: Configuring Uni Interfaces
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Configuring UNI Interfaces Configuring UNI Interfaces The User-Network Interface (UNI) specification defines communications between ATM end stations (such as workstations and routers) and ATM switches in private ATM networks. To configure a UNI interface, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 144: Configuring Nni Interfaces
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Configuring NNI Interfaces Configuring NNI Interfaces The Network-Network Interface (NNI) specification defines communications between two ATM switches in a private ATM network. You must configure NNI connections to allow for route discovery and topology analysis between the ATM switch routers.
Page 145: Configuring A 12-Bit Vpi Nni Interface (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Configuring NNI Interfaces Configuring a 12-Bit VPI NNI Interface (Catalyst 8540 MSR) The Catalyst 8540 MSR ATM switch router can accommodate up to six interfaces per module for maxvpi-bits greater than the standard 8-bit configuration. If you try to configure more than the maximum number of allowed interfaces with 12-bit virtual path identifiers (VPIs), follow these precautions: •...
Page 146: Displaying The 12-Bit Vpi Nni Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Configuring NNI Interfaces Displaying the 12-Bit VPI NNI Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To display the 12-bit VPI NNI interface configuration, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show switch module interface atm Displays the maxvpi-bits for the specified card/subcard/port ATM interface.
Page 147: Configuring Iisp Interfaces
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Configuring IISP Interfaces Configuring IISP Interfaces The Interim Interswitch Signalling Protocol (IISP) defines a static routing protocol for use between ATM switches. IISP provides support for switched virtual connections (SVCs) on switches that do not support the Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI) protocol.
Page 148: Displaying The Iisp Configuration
Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces Configuring IISP Interfaces Displaying the IISP Configuration To show the interface IISP configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm interface atm card/subcard/port[.vpt#] Shows the interface configuration. Example The following example shows the configuration of ATM interface 3/0/0 on the ATM switch router (SB-1): Switch(SB-1)# show atm interface atm 3/0/0 Interface:...
Page 149 C H A P T E R Configuring Virtual Connections This chapter describes how to configure virtual connections (VCs) in a typical ATM network after autoconfiguration has established the default network connections. The network configuration modifications described in this chapter are used to optimize your ATM network operation. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 150: Characteristics And Types Of Virtual Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Characteristics and Types of Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management, page 7-95 • Characteristics and Types of Virtual Connections This section lists the various virtual connections (VC) types in Table 7-1. Table 7-1 Supported VC Types Point-to- Point-to- Connection...
Page 151 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Virtual Channel Connections The value of the VPIs and VCIs can change as the traffic is relayed through the ATM network. Note To configure a point-to-point VCC, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 152: Displaying Vccs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Virtual Channel Connections The following example shows how to configure the internal cross-connect PVC on Switch C between interface ATM 0/0/0, VPI = 2, VCI = 100, and interface ATM 0/0/1, VPI 50, VCI = 255: Switch-C(config)# interface atm 0/0/0 Switch-C(config-if)# atm pvc 2 100 interface atm 0/0/1 50 255 Each subsequent VC cross-connection and link must be configured until the VC is terminated to create...
Page 153 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Virtual Channel Connections Examples The following example shows the Switch B PVC configuration on ATM interface 3/0/1: Switch-B# show atm interface Interface: ATM3/0/1 Port-type: oc3suni IF Status: Admin Status: Auto-config: enabled AutoCfgState: completed IF-Side: Network IF-type: Uni-type:...
Page 154: Deleting Vccs From An Interface
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Virtual Channel Connections The following example shows the Switch B PVC configuration on ATM interface 3/0/1, VPI = 0, VCI = 50, with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch-B# show atm vc interface atm 3/0/1 0 50 Interface: ATM3/0/1, Type: oc3suni VPI = 0 VCI = 50...
Page 155 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Virtual Channel Connections Example The following example shows how to delete the VCC on ATM interface 3/0/0, VPI = 20, VCI = 200: Switch(config-if)# interface atm 3/0/0 Switch(config-if)# no atm pvc 20 200 Confirming VCC Deletion To confirm the deletion of a VCC from an interface, use the following EXEC command before and after deleting the VCC: Command...
Page 156: Configuring Terminating Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Terminating PVC Connections Configuring Terminating PVC Connections This section describes configuring point-to-point and point-to-multipoint terminating permanent virtual channel (PVC) connections. Terminating connections provide the connection to the ATM switch router’s route processor for LAN emulation (LANE), IP over ATM, and control channels for Integrated Local Management Interface (ILMI), signalling, and Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI) plus network management.
Page 157 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Terminating PVC Connections To configure both point-to-point and point-to-multipoint terminating PVC connections, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm Selects the interface to be configured. card-A/subcard-A/port-A[.vpt#] Switch(config-if)# Step 2...
Page 158: Displaying The Terminating Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring PVP Connections When configuring the route processor leg of a PVC that is not a tunnel, the VPI should be configured as 0. The preferred method of VCI configuration is to select the any-vci parameter, unless a specific VCI is needed as a parameter in another command, such as map-list.
Page 159: Displaying Pvp Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring PVP Connections When configuring PVP connections, begin with lower virtual path identifier (VPI) numbers. Using low Note VPI numbers allows more efficient use of the switch fabric resources. The row index for rx-cttr and tx-cttr must be configured before using this optional parameter. See Note Chapter 9, “Configuring Resource Management.”...
Page 160 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring PVP Connections Example The following example shows the PVP configuration of Switch B: Switch-B# show atm vp Interface Type X-Interface X-VPI Status ATM1/1/1 ATM4/0/0 ATM4/0/0 ATM1/1/1 The following example shows the PVP configuration of Switch B with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch-B# show atm vp interface atm 4/0/0 30 Interface: ATM4/0/0, Type: ds3suni...
Page 161: Deleting Pvps From An Interface
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring PVP Connections Deleting PVPs from an Interface This section describes how to delete a PVP configured on an interface. To delete a PVP, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured.
Page 162: Configuring Point-To-Multipoint Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVC Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVC Connections This section describes configuring point-to-multipoint PVC connections. In Figure 7-4, cells entering the ATM switch router at the root point (on the left side at interface ATM 0/0/0, VPI = 50, VCI = 100) are duplicated and switched to the leaf points (output interfaces) on the right side of the figure.
Page 163: Displaying Point-To-Multipoint Pvc Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVC Connections This parameter specifies the weight assigned to the output VC for weighted round robin scheduling and Note is an integer in the range of 1 to 15.This parameter is valid only on systems equipped with the switch processor feature card.
Page 164 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVC Connections The following example shows the VC configuration on interface ATM 0/0/0, VPI = 50, VCI = 100, with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch# show atm vc interface atm 0/0/0 50 100 Interface: ATM0/0/0, Type: oc3suni VPI = 50 VCI = 100...
Page 165: Configuring Point-To-Multipoint Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVP Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVP Connections This section describes configuring point-to-multipoint PVP connections. Figure 7-5 provides an example of point-to-multipoint PVP connections. Figure 7-5 Point-to-Multipoint PVP Example IF# = 1/1/1 VPI = 60 IF# = 4/0/0 IF# = 3/0/0 network...
Page 166: Displaying Point-To-Multipoint Pvp Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint PVP Connections Displaying Point-to-Multipoint PVP Configuration To display the ATM interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm vp [interface atm card/subcard/port Shows the ATM VP configuration. vpi] Examples The following example shows the PVP configuration of the point-to-multipoint PVP connections on ATM interface 4/0/0: Switch# show atm vp interface atm 4/0/0 Interface...
Page 167: Configuring Soft Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections The following example shows the PVP configuration of the point-to-multipoint PVP connections on ATM interface 4/0/0, VPI = 50, with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch# show atm vp interface atm 4/0/0 50 Interface: ATM4/0/0, Type: ds3suni VPI = 50 Status: UP...
Page 168: Guidelines For Creating Soft Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections Figure 7-6 illustrates the soft PVC connections used in the following examples. Figure 7-6 Soft PCV Connection Example User A Switch B Switch C User D ATM network IF# = 0/0/2 IF# = 1/1/1 VPI = 0, VCI = 1000 VPI = 0, VCI = 1000...
Page 169 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(config)# interface atm Selects the interface to be configured. card/subcard/port[.vpt#] Switch(config-if)# Step 4 Switch(config-if)# atm soft-vc source-vpi Configures the soft PVC connection. source-vci dest-address atm-address dest-vpi dest-vci [enable | disable] [upc upc] [pd pd] [rx-cttr index] [tx-cttr index] [retry-interval [first interval] [maximum interval]] [redo-explicit...
Page 170: Displaying Soft Pvc Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections Displaying Soft PVC Configuration To display the soft PVC configuration at either end of a ATM switch router, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show atm vc interface atm card/subcard/port Shows the VCs configured on the ATM interface.
Page 171 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections The following example shows the soft PVC configuration of Switch B, on interface ATM 0/0/2 (VPI = 0, VCI = 1000) out to the ATM network with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch-B# show atm vc interface atm 0/0/2 0 1000 Interface: ATM0/0/2, Type: oc3suni VPI = 0...
Page 172: Modifying Cttr Indexes On An Existing Soft Pvc
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections Modifying CTTR Indexes on an Existing Soft PVC To change the CTTR indexes and PD (packet discard option) on an existing soft PVC, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 173 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVC Connections The following example modifies the packet discard option to On for an existing soft PVC. Switch(config)# intertace atm 0/0/3 Switch(config-if)# atm soft-vc 8 990 pd on The following example displays the packet-discard-option as enabled for the soft PVC configured on ATM interface 0/0/3.
Page 174: Configuring Soft Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVP Connections The following example modifies the packet discard option to Off for an existing soft PVC. Switch(config)# interface atm 0/0/3 Switch(config-if)# atm soft-vc 8 990 pd off The following example specifies different receive and transmit CTTR indexes and PD option for an existing soft PVC.
Page 175: Displaying Soft Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVP Connections To configure a soft PVP connection, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# atm soft-vp source-vpi Configures the soft PVP connection.
Page 176: Modifying Cttr Indexes On An Existing Soft Pvp
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVP Connections The following example shows the soft PVP configuration on interface ATM 1/1/1 at Switch C out to the ATM network: Switch-C# show atm vp Interface Type X-Interface X-VPI Status ATM1/1/1 ATM1/1/1 ATM1/1/1 SoftVP ATM1/1/1 The following example shows the soft PVP configuration at Switch B on interface ATM 0/0/2...
Page 177: Configuring The Soft Pvp Or Soft Pvc Route Optimization Feature
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring the Soft PVP or Soft PVC Route Optimization Feature Configuring the Soft PVP or Soft PVC Route Optimization Feature This section describes the soft PVP or soft PVC route optimization feature. Most soft PVPs or soft PVCs have a much longer lifetime than SVCs.
Page 178: Displaying An Interface Route Optimization Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring the Soft PVP or Soft PVC Route Optimization Feature Soft PVP or soft PVC route optimization must be enabled and configured to determine the point at which a better route is found and the old route is reconfigured. To enable and configure a soft PVC/PVP interface with route optimization, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command...
Page 179: Configuring Soft Pvcs With Explicit Paths
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs with Explicit Paths Configuring Soft PVCs with Explicit Paths Normally, soft PVCs and soft PVPs are automatically routed by PNNI over paths that meet the traffic parameter objectives. However, for cases where manually configured paths are needed, PNNI explicit paths can optionally be specified for routing the soft PVC or soft PVP.
Page 180: Displaying Explicit Path For Soft Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs with Explicit Paths The configuration displayed for soft connections with explicit paths is always shown as two separate Note lines using the redo-explicit keyword on the second line, even if it is originally configured using a single command line.
Page 181 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs with Explicit Paths Example The following example shows the last explicit path status for a soft PVC using the show atm vc interface EXEC command. Note that the first listed explicit path new_york.path2 shows an unreachable result, but the second explicit path new_york.path1 succeeded.
Page 182: Configuring Soft Pvcs And Soft Pvps With Priority
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs and Soft PVPs with Priority Configuring Soft PVCs and Soft PVPs with Priority This section describes how to specify priority for soft PVCs or PVPs established over an Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) interface. If an IMA link goes down, the performance of all virtual connections requesting guaranteed bandwidth (CBR, VBR-RT/NRT, ABR/UBR+ with nonzero MCR) can be adversely affected.
Page 183: Configuring A Soft Pvp With Priority
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs and Soft PVPs with Priority Command Purpose Step 2 Switch(config-if)# end Switches to EXEC command mode. Step 3 Switch# show atm vc interface atm Displays the soft PVC configuration information, card/subcard/port vpi vci including the holding priority.
Page 184 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs and Soft PVPs with Priority To configure a soft PVC with priority between two Frame Relay connections, use the following command: Command Purpose Switch(config-if)# frame-relay soft-vc dlci Configures a soft PVC with priority between dest-address nsap dlci dlci [hold-priority two Frame Relay connections.
Page 185 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Soft PVCs and Soft PVPs with Priority Example The following example shows the configuration of a soft PVC with priority on an IMA interface. Switch(config)# interface atm4/1/ima1 Switch(config-if)# atm svc-clear by-priority Switch# conf t Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Page 186: Configuring Two-Ended Soft Pvc And Soft Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Tx scr-clp01:none Tx mcr-clp01:none cdvt:none mbs:none Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections With two-ended soft PVC provisioning, you can configure a passive half leg on the terminating switch of a soft PVC.
Page 187: Configuring Two-Ended Soft Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC Connections To configure a two-ended soft PVC connection, follow these steps: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch-C(config)# atm filter-set name [index (Optional) Used to configure the access-control [number]] [permit | deny] [template | time-of-day filter-set parameter in on the passive {anytime | start-time {end-time}}]...
Page 188: Configuring Two-Ended Soft Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVP Connections To configure a two-ended soft PVP connection, follow these steps: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch-C(config)# atm filter-set name [index (Optional) Used to configure the access-control [number]] [permit | deny] [template | time-of-day filter-set parameter on the passive {anytime | start-time {end-time}}]...
Page 189 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Two-Ended Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections On Switch-B, create a two-ended soft PVC on the source switch that uses the passive half leg on the terminating switch. Switch-B(config)# interface atm 3/0/1 Switch-B(config-if)# atm soft-vc 0 50 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0050.e209.8001.4000.0c82.0030.00 1 60 On Switch-C, display the passive half-leg configuration information of two-ended soft PVC.
Page 190: Configuring Access Filters On Soft Pvc And Soft Pvp Passive Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections On Switch-B, create a two-ended soft PVP on the source switch that uses the passive half leg on the terminating switch. Switch-B(config-if)# atm soft-vp 10 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0050.e209.8001.4000.0c82.0030.00 1 On Switch-C, display the passive half-leg configuration information of two-ended soft PVP.
Page 191: Configuring Access Filters On Soft Pvc Passive Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections The access filters for soft PVC and soft PVP passive connections feature uses the access-control parameter, to restrict access to the passive destination side of the soft PVC or soft PVP based on the source interface NSAP address of the connection and time of day.
Page 192 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections On Switch-C, display the passive half-leg configuration information of two-ended soft PVC with the access control source ATM NSAP address. Switch-C# show atm vc interface atm0/0/1 1 60 Interface: ATM11/0/0, Type: quad_oc12suni VPI = 1 VCI = 60...
Page 193 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections On Switch-B, create a two-ended soft PVC on the source switch that uses the passive half leg on the terminating switch. Switch-B(config)# interface atm 3/0/1 Switch-B(config-if)# atm soft-vc 0 50 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0001.4204.d801.4000.0c85.8000.00 1 60 On Switch-C, display the passive half-leg configuration information of two-ended soft PVC with the...
Page 194 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections Using a filter set with multiple NSAP addresses — The following example shows the configuration of the two-ended soft PVC (shown in Figure 7-8) with access control configured using a more complex filter-set on the passive half leg.
Page 195: Configuring Access Filters On Soft Pvp Passive Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVP Passive Connections To configure a access filters on a two-ended soft PVP passive connection, follow these steps: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch-C(config)# atm filter-set name [index...
Page 196 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections On Switch-C, display the passive half-leg configuration information of two-ended soft PVP with the access control source ATM NSAP address configured. Switch-C# show atm vp interface atm 0/0/1 60 Interface: ATM0/0/1, Type: quad_oc12suni VPI = 60 Status: UP...
Page 197 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Access Filters on Soft PVC and Soft PVP Passive Connections On Switch-C, display the passive half-leg configuration information of two-ended soft PVP with the filter set fset1 configured. Switch-C# show atm vp interface atm 0/0/1 60 Interface: ATM0/0/1, Type: quad_oc12suni VPI = 60 Status: UP...
Page 198: Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft Pvc And Soft Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections On Switch-B, create a two-ended soft PVP on the source switch that uses the passive half leg on the terminating switch. Switch-B(config)# interface atm 3/0/1 Switch-B(config-if)# atm soft-vc 50 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0001.4204.d801.4000.0c85.8000.00 60 Using a filter set with time-of-day filters —...
Page 199: Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections The maximum limits for the timed soft PVC and PVP features follow: Maximum timer groups supported: 64 • Maximum timer rules supported: 64 • Maximum timer rules within a timer group: 16 •...
Page 200: Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft Pvps
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Example The following example shows absolute timer configuration. Switch# configure terminal Switch(config)# atm timer rule rule1 absolute start 10:00 30 dec 2004 end 10:30 31 dec 2004 The following example creates a timer group and adds a timer rule to a timer group.
Page 201: Displaying The Timer Rules Based Soft Pvc And Soft Pvp Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Example The following example configures a timer rules based soft PVP timer rule, creates an ATM timer group, and adds the timer group configuration to the soft PVP to set up or tear down the soft PVP based on the timer values configured.
Page 202 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Timer Rules Based Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections The following example is sample output from the show atm timer group command. Switch# show atm timer group timer-group: grp1 timer-rule rule1 timer-rule rule2 timer-group: grp2 timer-rule rule3 timer-rule...
Page 203: Configuring Backup Addresses For Soft Pvc And Soft Pvp Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections This section describes configuring redundant destinations for soft PVCs and soft PVPs. Redundant soft PVC and soft PVP destinations allow you to configure the same NSAP address on two different ATM interfaces.
Page 204 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections To check what NSAP address is advertised, use the show atm route command, as in the following example on Switch-C. Switch-C# show atm route Codes: P - installing Protocol (S - Static, P - PNNI, R - Routing control), T - Type (I - Internal prefix, E - Exterior prefix, SE - Summary Exterior prefix, SI - Summary Internal prefix, ZE - Suppress Summary Exterior, ZI - Suppress Summary...
Page 205: Redundant Soft Vc Destinations On Different Switches
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Figure 7-9 Redundant Soft PVC Destinations, Single Switch Example C8540-1 DSLAM atm1/1/0 ATM PNNI network atm 1/1/1 Setup call to: atm 1/1/0 (active): 47.0091.8100.0000.1111. 47.0091.8100.0000.1111. 1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.00 1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.00 atm 1/1/1 (standby):...
Page 206 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections To check what NSAP addresses are advertised, use the show atm route command, as in the following example on Switch-C. Switch-C# show atm route Codes: P - installing Protocol (S - Static, P - PNNI, R - Routing control), T - Type (I - Internal prefix, E - Exterior prefix, SE - Summary Exterior prefix, SI - Summary Internal prefix, ZE - Suppress Summary Exterior, ZI - Suppress Summary...
Page 207: Configuring Redundant Soft Vc Destinations
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Figure 7-10 Redundant Soft PVC Destinations, Two Switch Example C8540-1 DSLAM atm1/1/0 ATM PNNI network Setup call to: atm 1/1/0 (active): 47.0091.8100.0000.1111. 47.0091.8100.0000.1111. 1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.00 1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.00 C8540-2 atm 1/1/0 atm 1/1/0 (standby):...
Page 208 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Command Purpose Step 8 Switch# show atm soft redundancy group Displays the ATM soft redundancy group [group-name] configuration. Step 9 Switch# show atm addresses Displays the ATM NSAP address of the redundant soft PVC destination.
Page 209: Displaying The Redundant Soft Vc Destination Address Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections Displaying the Redundant Soft VC Destination Address Configuration To show the redundant soft VC destination address configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose Switch# show atm soft redundancy group Displays the ATM soft redundancy group [group-name] configuration.
Page 210 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Backup Addresses for Soft PVC and Soft PVP Connections The following example shows the specific ATM soft VC redundancy group named group3. Switch# show atm soft redundancy group group3 Group Name: group3 Nsap Address: 11.2233.4455.6677.8c11.1111.1111.4000.0c80.0000.00 Operating Mode: Load Balance Interface Name Status Number of VCs...
Page 211: Configuring Point-To-Multipoint Soft Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections The following show atm addresses command displays the both the active and standby soft VC redundant address of a single switch configuration with load balancing configured. Switch# show atm addresses [Information Deleted] Soft VC Redundant Address(es): 47.0091.8100.0000.00a0.f209.b601.3000.0c88.1080.00 ATM0/0/1(A)
Page 212: Guidelines For Creating Point-To-Multipoint Soft Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections To configure point-to-multipoint circuit emulation services (CES) soft PVC connections see the “Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections” section on page 19-63. Figure 7-11 illustrates the point-to-multipoint soft PVC connections used in the following examples. Figure 7-11 Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connection Example Address = 47.0091.8100.0000.0090.2156.d801.4000.0c80.1010.00 VPI = 50, VCI = 110...
Page 213: Configuring Point-To-Multipoint Soft Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVCs To configure a point-to-multipoint soft PVC connection, perform the following steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch# show atm addresses Determines the destination ATM address. Step 2 Switch# configure terminal At the privileged EXEC prompt, enters...
Page 214: Configuration Mode
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections The following configuration example uses the interfaces and addresses displayed in Figure 7-11: Examples Determine the ATM address of the Dest_One switch for ATM interface 0/1/1: Step 1 Dest_One# show atm addresses Switch Address(es): 47.0091.8100.0000.0090.2156.d801.0090.2156.d801.00 active 47.0091.8100.0000.0040.0b0a.c501.0040.0b0a.c501.00...
Page 215: Displaying Point-To-Multipoint Soft Pvc Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections Use the following similar process to configure the Soft PVC connection to the Dest_Two switch: Step 6 Source(atmsoft-p2mp)# party leaf-reference 2 Source(atmsoft-p2mp-party)# dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.00e0.4fac.b401.4000.0c80.9030.00 50 120 Source(atmsoft-p2mp-party)# end Source# Finally, confirm the connections are up and working using the commands in the section, “Displaying Step 7 Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Configuration”...
Page 216: Configuring Traffic Parameters For Point-To-Multipoint Soft-Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections The following example shows the point-to-multipoint soft PVC configuration of the Source switch, on interface ATM 0/0/1 (VPI = 50, VCI = 100): Source# show atm vc interface atm 0/0/1 50 100 Interface: ATM0/0/1, Type: oc3suni VPI = 50 VCI = 100...
Page 217: Enabling And Disabling The Root Of A Point-To-Multipoint Soft-Pvc Connections
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections Command Purpose Step 2 Switch(atmsoft-p2mp)# upc {drop | pass | tag} Configures the UPC options on a point-to-multipoint soft PVC connection. Step 3 Switch(atmsoft-p2mp)# cttr {rx index | tx index} Configures the connection traffic table row type and index on a point-to-multipoint soft PVC connection.
Page 218: Enabling And Disabling A Leaf Of A Point-To-Multipoint Soft Pvc
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections Examples The following example disables the root of a point-to-multipoint Soft PVC connection configured on an ATM interface and releases all parties: Switch# config terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Page 219: Confirming The Party Leaf Is Disabled Or Enabled
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections Confirming the Party Leaf is Disabled or Enabled To confirm the individual leaf of the point-to-multipoint soft PVC is disabled or enabled, use the following EXEC command before and after disabling and enabling the point-to-multipoint soft PVCs: Command Purpose show running-config interface atm...
Page 220: Configuring The Retry Interval For Point-To-Multipoint Soft-Pvc Parties
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections The word “Inactive” appears under the State field for party leaf-reference 20 disable in the previous section but, the second party leaf-reference 30, that was not disabled, has the word “Active” under the State field.
Page 221: Confirming Vcc Deletion
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Soft PVC Connections To delete an individual point-to-multipoint soft PVC leaf connection, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# atm soft-vc vpi vci p2mp...
Page 222: Configuring Nondefault Well-Known Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Nondefault Well-Known PVCs Configuring Nondefault Well-Known PVCs Normally the default well-known VCs are automatically created with default virtual channel identifiers (VCIs). However, for the unusual instances where the ATM switch router interfaces with nonstandard equipment, you can configure nondefault well-known VCI values on a per-interface basis.
Page 223: Configuring Nondefault Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Nondefault Well-Known PVCs Configuring Nondefault PVCs To configure the nondefault PVCs for signalling, ILMI, and PNNI, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# atm manual-well-known-vc...
Page 224: Configuring A Vpi/Vci Range For Svps And Svcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring a VPI/VCI Range for SVPs and SVCs Configure the ILMI VC, then configure the PNNI VC if needed using the same procedure. Step 6 Save the new running configuration to the startup configuration. Step 7 An example of this procedure follows: Switch# show atm vc interface atm 0/0/0 Interface...
Page 225 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring a VPI/VCI Range for SVPs and SVCs The default maximum switched virtual path connection (SVPC) VPI is equal to 255. You can change the maximum SVPC VPI by entering the atm svpc vpi max value command. See Table 7-3 for the allowable ranges.
Page 226 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring a VPI/VCI Range for SVPs and SVCs Examples The following example shows how to confirm the VPI and VCI range configuration on an ATM interface. The values displayed for ConfMaxSvpcVpi, ConfMaxSvccVpi, and ConfMinSvccVci are local values. The values displayed for CurrMaxSvpcVpi, CurrMaxSvccVpi, and CurrMinSvccVci are negotiated values.
Page 227: Configuring Vp Tunnels
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Configuring VP Tunnels This section describes configuring virtual path (VP) tunnels, which provide the ability to interconnect ATM switch routers across public networks using PVPs. You can configure a VP tunnel to carry a single service category, or you can configure a VP tunnel to carry multiple service categories, including merged VCs.
Page 228: Configuring A Vp Tunnel For A Single Service Category
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Configuring a VP Tunnel for a Single Service Category The type of VP tunnel described in this section is configured as a VP of a single service category. Only virtual circuits (VCs) of that service category can transit the tunnel. To configure a VP tunnel connection for a single service category, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command...
Page 229: Displaying The Vp Tunnel Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels The following example shows how to configure the ATM VP tunnel on the ATM switch router (SB-1) interface ATM 0/0/0, VPI 99: Switch(SB-1)(config)# interface atm 0/0/0 Switch(SB-1)(config-if)# atm pvp 99 Switch(SB-1)(config-if)# exit Switch(SB-1)(config)# interface atm 0/0/0.99 Switch(SB-1)(config-subif)# end Switch(SB-1)#...
Page 230: Configuring A Shaped Vp Tunnel On An Interface
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Even though the shaped VP tunnel is defined as CBR, it can carry VCs of another service category • by substituting the new service category after the tunnel interface has been initially configured. For configuration information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring Resource Management.”...
Page 231: Displaying The Shaped Vp Tunnel Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Displaying the Shaped VP Tunnel Configuration To display the shaped VP tunnel interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm interface atm Shows the ATM VP interface configuration. card/subcard/port.vpt# For an example display from the show atm interface command, see Displaying the Hierarchical VP Tunnel Configuration, page...
Page 232: Enabling Hierarchical Mode
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels At system boot, when global hierarchical scheduling is enabled, the switch router initializes the slot • pairs according to the following restrictions: Hierarchical scheduling is disabled for any slot pair that contains an ATM router module or –...
Page 233: Displaying The Hierarchical Vp Tunnel Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels To configure a hierarchical VP tunnel, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# atm Configures the connection-traffic-table row for connection-traffic-table-row [index row-index] the desired PVP CBR cell rate. cbr pcr rate Step 2 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port...
Page 234: Configuring An End-Point Pvc To A Pvp Tunnel
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Example The following example shows the VP tunnel configuration on interface ATM 1/0/0 with PVP 99: Switch# show atm interface atm 1/0/0.99 Interface: ATM1/0/0.99 Port-type: vp tunnel IF Status: Admin Status: Auto-config: enabled AutoCfgState: waiting for response from peer...
Page 235: Displaying Pvcs
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Displaying PVCs To confirm PVC interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm vc interface atm card/subcard/port Shows the ATM VC interface configuration. Example The following example shows the configuration of ATM subinterface 1/0/0.99 on the ATM switch router Switch(HB-1): Switch(HB-1)# show atm vc interface atm 0/0/1 Interface...
Page 236: Displaying The Vp Tunnel Vpci Configuration
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring VP Tunnels Displaying the VP Tunnel VPCI Configuration To confirm the VP tunnel VPCI configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose more system:running-config Shows the VP tunnel subinterface configuration. Deleting VP Tunnels To delete a VP tunnel connection, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 237: Configuring Interface And Connection Snooping
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Interface and Connection Snooping Example The following example shows that ATM subinterface 1/0/0.99 on the ATM switch router (HB-1) has been deleted: Switch(HB-1)# show interfaces atm 1/0/0 IF Status: Admin Status: Auto-config: disabled AutoCfgState: not applicable IF-Side: Network...
Page 238: Snooping Test Ports (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Interface and Connection Snooping Snooping Test Ports (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) With the FC-PCQ installed, only the highest port on the last module in the ATM switch router can be configured as a snoop test port. Table 7-4 lists the interface number of the allowed snoop test port for the various port adapter types.
Page 239: Other Configuration Options For Snoop Test Port
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Interface and Connection Snooping Other Configuration Options for Snoop Test Port Most inapplicable configurations on the test port interface are disregarded while in snoop mode. However, the following configuration options are not valid when specified for the snoop test port and may affect the proper operation of the snoop mode on the test port: Diagnostic and PIF loopbacks of the snoop test port.
Page 240: Configuring Per-Connection Snooping
With per-connection snooping you must specify both the snooped connection endpoint and the snooping connection endpoint. The Cisco IOS software adds the snooping connection endpoint as a leaf to the snooped connection. The root of the temporary multicast connection depends on the direction being snooped.
Page 241: Displaying Per-Connection Snooping
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Interface and Connection Snooping Examples The following example shows how to configure VC 100 200 on ATM interface 3/1/0 to snoop VC 200 150 on ATM interface 1/0/0: Switch(config)# interface atm 3/1/0 Switch(config-if)# atm snoop-vc 100 200 interface atm 1/0/0 200 150 direction receive The following example shows how to configure VP 100 on ATM interface 3/1/0 to snoop VP 200 on ATM interface 1/0/0: Switch(config)# interface atm 3/1/0...
Page 242 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Configuring Interface and Connection Snooping The following example shows the VC snoop connection 0, 55 on ATM interface 0/0/2 in extended mode with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch> show atm snoop-vc interface atm 0/0/2 0 55 Interface: ATM0/0/2, Type: oc3suni VPI = 0 VCI = 55...
Page 243: Input Translation Table Management
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management The following example shows all VP snoop connections on ATM interface 0/1/2, VPI = 57, in extended mode with the switch processor feature card installed: Switch> show atm snoop-vp interface atm 0/1/2 57 Interface: ATM0/1/2, Type: oc3suni VPI = 57 Status: DOWN...
Page 244: Vc Block Allocation
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management For each direction of a transit VP or VC installed in the hardware, there is an entry in the ITT. If the VPI is valid, the entry in the look-up table maps to either a single ITT entry, in the case of transit VP, or to a block of ITT, in the case of a VPI that consists of transit VCs.
Page 245: Reducing Itt Fragmentation
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management Capability to display ITT allocation • Capability to autoshrink ITT blocks • Reducing ITT Fragmentation It is important to make adjustments to the VC configuration processing, both at initial boot-up and in response to interface flaps.
Page 246: Using The Autominblock Command To Enable The Minimum Mode
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(config-if)# atm input-xlate-table Repeats this command for as many VPIs are minblock vpi vpi-value block-size force required. Step 4 Switch(config-if)# exit Returns to global configuration mode. The CLI-specified non-force minblock interface configuration command is overridden when one or more of the following four conditions are present: When the minblock command is processed and the existing PVCs on the interface are sufficient to •...
Page 247 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management On initial configuration of the atm input-xlate-table autominblock command, ITT memory may already be somewhat fragmented due to previous commands. The effect of the fragmentation can be minimized by configuring, when first using the VPI, a cross-connect that uses the maximum VCI on a VPI.
Page 248: Shrinking Itt Block Size
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management Shrinking ITT Block Size Natively, an ITT block will grow as necessary to accommodate higher VCIs on a given port/VPI, but will not automatically shrink as the high-numbered VCIs are removed from the configuration. An allocated ITT block will be freed if it has only one member VC, and that member VC is deleted;...
Page 249: Configuration Examples
Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management Configuration Examples This section shows two examples of the show atm input-xkate-table command. Example (LightStream1010 and 6400 NSP1) show atm input-xlate-table [inuse] Use this nonprivileged exec mode command to display ITT usage details. The output of the unqualified command, (without the inuse keyword) shows detail of the free blocks by size and bank, the aggregate free space, and the location of the blocks that are in use.
Page 250 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management The output of the unqualified command (without the inuse keyword) is: switch# show atm input-xlate-table Input Translation Table Free Blocks: Block-start Size Bank 17408 17536 17664 17920 1024 1024 2048 2048 18432 2048 4096...
Page 251 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management The output of the command with the inuse keyword is: switch# show atm input-xlate-table inuse switch# show atm input inuse Interface VP/VC Address Size ATM0/1/0 17472 ATM0/1/0 32768 ATM0/1/2 49216 ATM0/1/2 ATM1/0/0 49280 ATM1/0/0...
Page 252 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management The output of the unqualified command (without the inuse keyword) is: switch# show atm input Module 1 Input Translation Table Free Blocks: Block-start Size 1280 3072 1024 6144 2048 8192 8192 16384 16384 Input Translation Table Total Free = 28736...
Page 253 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management 2048 2048 4096 4096 8192 8192 16384 16384 Input Translation Table Total Free = 32768 Input Translation Table In Use (display combines contiguous blocks): Inuse-start Inuse-end Size =============================================== Module 5 Input Translation Table Free Blocks: Block-start Size 1024...
Page 254 Chapter 7 Configuring Virtual Connections Input Translation Table Management Input Translation Table Total Free = 32768 Input Translation Table In Use (display combines contiguous blocks): Inuse-start Inuse-end Size =============================================== The output of the command with the inuse keyword is: switch# show atm input inuse Module Interface VP/VC Address Size VP-inuse...
Page 255: Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, And Maintenance
C H A P T E R Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance This chapter describes the Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) implementation on the ATM switch router. Note This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers. For complete descriptions of the commands mentioned in this chapter, refer to the ATM Switch Router Command Reference publication.
Page 256 Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance OAM Overview Both F4 and F5 flows can be configured as either end-to-end or segment-loopback and used with alarm indication signal (AIS) and remote defect indication (RDI) functions. An AIS is a signal transmitted downstream informing the destination that an upstream failure has been detected.
Page 257: Configuring Oam Functions
Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Configuring OAM Functions Configuring OAM Functions This section describes OAM commands in EXEC, global, and interface configuration mode. Configuring OAM for the Entire Switch (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To enable OAM operations for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, use the global configuration command, as shown in the following table: Command Purpose...
Page 258: Configuring The Interface-Level Oam
Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Configuring OAM Functions Switch(config)# atm oam ais seg-loopback % OAM: Switch level seg loopback is enabled % OAM: Switch level ais is enabled The following example shows how to configure the ATM OAM connection maximum to 1600: Switch(config)# atm oam max-limit 1600 Configuring the Interface-Level OAM To enable OAM operations on an interface, perform the following steps, beginning in global...
Page 259: Checking The Atm Connection (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Checking the ATM Connection (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Checking the ATM Connection (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To check ATM connection reachability and network connectivity on the Catalyst 8540 MSR, use the ping EXEC command, as shown in the following table: Command Purpose ping atm interface atm card/subcard/port vpi...
Page 260: Displaying The Oam Configuration
Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Displaying the OAM Configuration Command Purpose ping atm interface atm card/subcard/port vpi Checks the connection. [vci] {[atm-prefix prefix] | end-loopback [destination] | ip-address ip-address | seg-loopback [destination]} You can use either an ATM address prefix or an IP address as a ping destination. You can ping a neighbor switch by selecting the segment loopback option.
Page 261 Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Displaying the OAM Configuration Example The OAM configuration is displayed in the following example: Switch# more system:running-config Building configuration... Current configuration: version XX.X no service pad service udp-small-servers service tcp-small-servers hostname Switch boot system flash slot0:rhino/ls1010-wi-m_1.083.bin.Z ip rcmd remote-username doug atm oam max-limit 1600 atm over-subscription-factor 16...
Page 262 Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Displaying the OAM Configuration ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide OL-7396-01...
Page 263: Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management
C H A P T E R Configuring Resource Management This chapter describes resource management, which involves modeling and managing switch, interface, and connection resources. Such resources include equivalent bandwidth and buffering to support the provision of specified traffic classes. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 264: Resource Management Functions
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Resource Management Functions Resource Management Functions The ATM switch router resource management software provides the following functions: Network management interface—Includes operational configuration changes (take place • immediately), proposed configuration changes (take place on restart), user interface, and status. Default quality of service (QoS) objective table management—Since User-Network Interface 3 •...
Page 265: Processor Feature Card Functionality (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Processor Feature Card Functionality (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Table 9-1 Switch Processor Feature Card (continued) Feature Description Shaping Per-port pacing, per-CBR VC, per-CBR transit VP, per-shaped CBR VP tunnel (128 shaped VP tunnels total), and hierarchical VP tunnels Policing (UPC Dual leaky bucket...
Page 266: Configuring Global Resource Management
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management Table 9-2 FC-PCQ and FC-PFQ Feature Comparison (continued) Feature FC-PCQ FC-PFQ Intelligent tail (partial) packet Supported Supported discard Selective cell marking and Multiple fixed thresholds Multiple, weighted, dynamic discard thresholds Shaping Per-port (pacing) Per-port pacing, per-CBR VC, per-CBR transit VP, per-shaped...
Page 267: Configuring The Default Qos Objective Table
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management Configuring the Sustainable Cell Rate Margin Factor, page 9-13 • Overview of Threshold Groups, page 9-14 • Configuring the Default QoS Objective Table Resource management provides a table of default objective values for quality of service (QoS) for guaranteed service categories.
Page 268: Displaying The Atm Qos Objective Table
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management Displaying the ATM QoS Objective Table To display the default QoS objective table, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm qos-defaults Displays the ATM QoS objective table configuration. The per-service category, maximum cell transfer delay, peak-to-peak cell delay variation, and maximum cell loss ratio objectives are displayed.
Page 269: Displaying The Osf Configuration (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management To configure the OSF, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose atm over-subscription-factor o-value Configures the switch OSF from 1 to 32. This value can be changed at any time, but it is only used at start-up and when a module is hot-swapped Note from the chassis.
Page 270: Displaying The Service Category Limit Configuration (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management Caution Setting a service category limit to 0 causes the connection requests for the associated service categories to be rejected. To configure the service category limits, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose atm service-category-limit {cbr | vbr-rt |...
Page 271: Displaying The Abr Congestion Notification Mode Configuration (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management The global configuration function is used to modify the ABR mode selection for all ABR connections. To configure the ABR mode, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose atm abr-mode {efci | relative-rate | all} Configures ABR congestion notification mode.
Page 272: Configuring The Connection Traffic Table
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management cells limit limit Mark Discard count instal instal instal --------------------------------------------------- 65535 25 % 87 % cbr-default-tg 65535 25 % 87 % vbrrt-default-tg 65535 25 % 87 % vbrnrt-default-tg 65535 25 % 87 % abr-default-tg 65535...
Page 273: Pvc Connection Traffic Rows
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management PVC Connection Traffic Rows The CTT in a permanent virtual channel (PVC) setup requires storing PVC traffic values in a CTT data structure. Rows used for PVCs are called stable rows, and contain traffic parameters. SVC Connection Traffic Rows The CTT in a switched virtual channel (SVC) setup provides a row identifier that Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) or the user interface can use to read or display SVC traffic parameters.
Page 274: Displaying The Atm Connection Traffic Table
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management The atm connection-traffic-table-row command supports these service categories: CBR, VBR-RT, VBR-NRT, ABR, and UBR. To create or delete an ATM CTT row, perform the following tasks in global configuration mode: Your CTT feature set depends on the type of feature card that is installed on the Catalyst 8510 MSR and Note LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers route processor.
Page 275: Configuring The Sustainable Cell Rate Margin Factor
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management none vbr-rt none vbr-nrt none none none none 64000 1741 none 2147483645* none none 2147483646* none none 2147483647* 7113539 none none Configuring the Sustainable Cell Rate Margin Factor The sustained cell rate margin factor determines the aggressiveness of weighting sustainable cell rate (SCR) compared to peak cell rate (PCR).
Page 276: Overview Of Threshold Groups
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management instal instal instal ------------------------------------------------------------ 131071 25 % 87 % cbr-default-tg 131071 25 % 87 % vbrrt-default-tg 131071 25 % 87 % vbrnrt-default-tg 131071 25 % 87 % abr-default-tg 131071 25 % 87 % ubr-default-tg 131071...
Page 277: Configuring The Threshold Group
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management Table 9-7 Threshold Group Configuration Parameter Defaults Maximum Minimum Maximum Queue Queue Mark Discard Group Cells Limit Limit Threshold Threshold 65,535 65,535 VBR-RT 65,535 VBR-NRT 65,535 65,535 65,535 1023 1023 well-known VCs 1.
Page 278: Displaying The Threshold Group Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Global Resource Management Command Purpose Step 7 Switch(config)# atm threshold-group Configures the maximum number of cells queued [module-id module] group max-cells number for specified threshold group for all module-ids. Optionally, configure for the specified threshold group for the specified module-id.
Page 279: Configuring Physical Interfaces
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces 131071 25 % 87 % ubr-default-tg 131071 1023 1023 25 % 87 % well-known-vc-tg =========================================================== <information deleted> Configuring Physical Interfaces Physical interface resource management configurations affect only specific interfaces on the switch. The following sections describe physical interface configuration resource management tasks: •...
Page 280: Displaying The Output Queue Maximum Configuration (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces The atm output-queue command affects all connections, including those already established. Note This command is not applicable for subinterface level configuration. For other restrictions, refer to the ATM Switch Router Command Reference publication. If the interface status is up, the force parameter is required before the request is completed.
Page 281: Configuring The Interface Queue Thresholds Per Service Category (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces Sustained-cell-rate: none vbr RX, none vbr TX Minimum-cell-rate RX: none abr, none ubr Minimum-cell-rate TX: none abr, none ubr CDVT RX: none cbr, none vbr, none abr, none ubr CDVT TX: none cbr, none vbr, none abr, none ubr MBS: none vbr RX, none vbr TX Resource Management state: Cell-counts: 0 cbr, 0 vbr-rt, 0 vbr-nrt, 0 abr-ubr...
Page 282 Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces These commands affect all connections, including those already established. Note These commands are not applicable for subinterface level configurations. For other restrictions, refer to the ATM Switch Router Command Reference publication. Examples The following example shows how to configure the interface output threshold CBR discard threshold to 87 percent of maximum size: Switch(config)# interface atm 3/0/0...
Page 283: Configuring Interface Output Pacing
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces CDVT TX: none cbr, none vbr, none abr, none ubr MBS: none vbr RX, none vbr TX <information deleted> Configuring Interface Output Pacing Output pacing is used to artificially reduce the output speed of an interface in kbps. Output pacing can be changed at any time, enabled, or disabled.
Page 284: Displaying The Output Pacing Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces Displaying the Output Pacing Configuration To display the output pacing configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm interface resource atm Displays the output pacing configuration. card/subcard/port Example The following example shows the interface output pacing configuration: Switch>...
Page 285: Displaying The Controlled Link Sharing Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces Table 9-8 Connection Admission Control Parameter to Bandwidth Relationships (continued) Service Category Value Service Category Bandwidth Minimum VBR <= Maximum Aggregate <= 95 percent Maximum CBR <= Maximum Aggregate <= 95 percent Maximum VBR <= Maximum Aggregate...
Page 286: Configuring The Scheduler And Service Class
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces Switch> show atm interface resource atm 0/0/0 Resource Management configuration: Service Classes: Service Category map: c1 cbr, c2 vbr-rt, c3 vbr-nrt, c4 abr, c5 ubr Scheduling: RS c1 WRR c2, WRR c3, WRR c4, WRR c5 WRR Weight: 8 c2, 1 c3, 1 c4, 1 c5 Pacing: disabled 0 Kbps rate configured, 0 Kbps rate installed...
Page 287: Displaying The Interface Service Class Information
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical Interfaces For a detailed description of rate and WRR scheduling, refer to the Guide to ATM Technology. Note To configure the interface service class and WRR value, perform the following tasks, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 288: Configuring Physical And Logical Interface Parameters
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters The following sections describe interface configuration resource management tasks for both physical and logical interface types: Configuring the Interface Link Distance, page 9-26 •...
Page 289: Configuring The Limits Of Best-Effort Connections
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Command Purpose show atm interface resource atm Displays the interface link distance card/subcard/port[.vpt#] configuration. Example The following example shows the configuration of the interface link distance with switch processor feature card installed: Switch>...
Page 290: Displaying The Interface Best-Effort Limit Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Example The following example shows how to configure the connection best-effort limit configuration to 2000: Switch(config)# interface atm 3/0/0 Switch(config-if)# atm cac best-effort-limit 2000 Displaying the Interface Best-Effort Limit Configuration To display the interface best-effort configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 291: Configuring The Interface Maximum Of Individual Traffic Parameters
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Configuring the Interface Maximum of Individual Traffic Parameters When a VCC is set up, you can specify per-flow (receive and transmit traffic) parameters. Traffic parameter limits may be configured independently by service category and traffic direction for the following: •...
Page 292: Displaying The Interface Maximum Individual Traffic Parameter Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Switch(config)# interface atm 3/0/0 Switch(config-if)# atm cac max-cdvt cbr receive 75000 Displaying the Interface Maximum Individual Traffic Parameter Configuration To display the interface maximum individual traffic parameter configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 293: Configuring The Atm Default Cdvt And Mbs
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Configuring the ATM Default CDVT and MBS You can change the default cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT) and maximum burst size (MBS) to request for UPC of cells received on the interface for connections that do not individually request a CDVT or MBS value.
Page 294 Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Cast-type: point-to-point Packet-discard-option: disabled Usage-Parameter-Control (UPC): pass Wrr weight: 32 Number of OAM-configured connections: 0 OAM-configuration: disabled OAM-states: Not-applicable Cross-connect-interface: ATM0/0/2, Type: oc3suni Cross-connect-VPI = 0 Cross-connect-VCI = 100 Cross-connect-UPC: pass Cross-connect OAM-configuration: disabled Cross-connect OAM-state:...
Page 295: Configuring Interface Service Category Support
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Rx mcr-clp01: none cdvt: 1024 (from default for interface) mbs: none Tx connection-traffic-table-index: 1 Tx service-category: UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) Tx pcr-clp01: 7113539 Tx scr-clp01: none Tx mcr-clp01: none cdvt: none mbs: none Configuring Interface Service Category Support...
Page 296: Displaying The Service Category On An Interface
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters To configure a service category on an interface, perform the following tasks, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm Selects the interface to be configured. card/subcard/port[.vpt#] Switch(config-if)# Step 2...
Page 297: Configuring Svc Policing By Service Category
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Configuring SVC Policing by Service Category You can configure policing on any ATM switch router interface to tag or drop cells in the forward (into the network) direction of a virtual connection. These traffic policing mechanisms are known as usage parameter control (UPC).
Page 298: Displaying The Service Category Policing On An Interface
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Physical and Logical Interface Parameters Displaying the Service Category Policing on an Interface To display the service category policing configured on an interface, use the following user EXEC commands: Command Purpose show atm interface atm card/subcard/port Displays the service category policing configuration.
Page 299: Configuring Interface Overbooking
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Interface Overbooking Switch# In the previous example, ATM interface 1/1/1 is configured to allow any UBR traffic to passed while all other traffic is policed. Configuring Interface Overbooking The interface overbooking feature allows the available equivalent bandwidth of an interface to exceed the maximum cell rate (MaxCR) or physical line rate on ATM and inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) interfaces.
Page 300: Displaying The Interface Overbooking Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Interface Overbooking To configure interface overbooking, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 interface atm card/subcard/slot Specifies the physical interface to configure. Switch(config-if)# interface atm card/subcard/imagroup Specifies the IMA group interface to configure. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# shutdown...
Page 301: Configuring Service Class Overbooking
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Service Class Overbooking Max aggregate guaranteed services: none RX, none TX Max bandwidth: none cbr RX, none cbr TX, none vbr RX, none vbr TX, none abr RX, none abr TX, none ubr RX, none ubr TX Min bandwidth: none cbr RX, none cbr TX, none vbr RX, none vbr TX, none abr RX, none abr TX, none ubr RX, none ubr TX Best effort connection limit: disabled...
Page 302: Displaying The Interface Overbooking Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Service Class Overbooking To configure overbooking on an individual service class, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 interface atm card/subcard/slot[.vpt#] Specifies the physical interface to configure. Switch(config-if)# interface atm card/subcard/imagroup Specifies the IMA group interface to configure.
Page 303: Configuring Framing Overhead
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Framing Overhead vbr-rt : 200%, vbr-nrt : disabled abr : disabled, ubr : 200% Service Categories supported: cbr,vbr-rt,vbr-nrt,abr,ubr Link Distance: 0 kilometers Controlled Link sharing: Max aggregate guaranteed services: none RX, none TX Max bandwidth: none cbr RX, none cbr TX, none vbr RX, none vbr TX, none abr RX, none abr TX, none ubr RX, none ubr TX Min bandwidth: none cbr RX, none cbr TX, none vbr RX, none vbr TX, none abr RX, none abr TX, none ubr RX, none ubr TX...
Page 304: Displaying The Framing Overhead Configuration
Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Framing Overhead Table 9-11 MaxCR For Different Framing Overhead Configurations (continued) With Framing Overhead Without Framing Overhead Interface Type Framing Mode Configured Configured G 751 PLCP 30,528 kbps 34,367 kbps CRC4 ADM 1919 kbps 2047 kbps CRC4 PLCP 1785 kbps...
Page 305 Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Framing Overhead Switch> show atm interface resource atm 4/1/0 Resource Management configuration: Service Classes: Service Category map: c2 cbr, c2 vbr-rt, c3 vbr-nrt, c4 abr, c5 ubr Scheduling: RS c1 WRR c2, WRR c3, WRR c4, WRR c5 WRR Weight: 15 c2, 2 c3, 2 c4, 2 c5 CAC Configuration to account for Framing Overhead : Enabled Pacing: disabled...
Page 306 Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management Configuring Framing Overhead ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 9-44 OL-7396-01...
Page 307: Configuring The Global Ilmi System
C H A P T E R Configuring ILMI This chapter describes the Integrated Local Management Interface (ILMI) protocol implementation within the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers. For a description of the role of ILMI, refer to the Guide to ATM Technology.
Page 308: Chapter 10 Configuring Ilmi
Note If you use Cisco's Simple Server Redundancy Protocol (SSRP) for LAN emulation in this network, ILMI registration of well-known group addresses should be permitted. This allows the active LECS to register the well-known LECS address with the switch. Either the permit all, permit matching-prefix wellknown-groups, or permit matching-prefix all-groups option should be configured.
Page 309: Display The Ilmi Access Filter Configuration
Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring the Global ILMI System Example The following example configures the global default access filter for ILMI address registration to allow well-known group addresses and addresses with matching prefixes: Switch(config)# atm ilmi default-access permit matching-prefix wellknown-groups See the command atm address-registration in the ATM Switch Router Command Reference publication for information on configuration of the individual interface access filter override.
Page 310: Displaying The Ilmi Global Configuration
LECS Address(es): 47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01.4000.0c81.9030.01 47.0091.8100.0000.0000.0ca7.9e01.4000.0c81.9030.02 Since Cisco IOS Release12.0(1a)W5(5b) of the system software, addressing the interface on the route Note processor (CPU) has changed for Catalyst 8510 and LightStream 1010 platforms. The ATM interface is now called atm0, and the Ethernet interface is now called ethernet0. Old formats (atm 2/0/0 and ethernet 2/0/0) are still supported.
Page 311: Configuring An Ilmi Interface
Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring an ILMI Interface ARP Server Address (s): 1122334455667788990011223344556677889900 The following example shows the ILMI status: Switch# show atm ilmi-status Interface : ATM0 Interface Type : Local Configured Prefix(s) : 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.c386.b301 Interface : ATM3/0/0 Interface Type : Private NNI ILMI VCC : (0, 16) ILMI Keepalive : Disabled Configured Prefix(s) : 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.c386.b301...
Page 312: Configuring Per-Interface Ilmi Address Prefixes
Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring an ILMI Interface If you use the no atm address-registration command to disable ILMI on this interface, the keepalives Note and responses to incoming ILMI queries continue to function. If you want ILMI to be completely disabled at this interface, use the no atm ilmi-enable command.
Page 313 Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring an ILMI Interface To display the ILMI address prefix configuration for all interfaces, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm addresses Displays the interface ILMI address prefix configuration. Example The following example shows the ILMI address prefix configuration for all ATM interfaces: Switch# show atm addresses Switch Address(es): 47.00918100000000410B0A1081.00410B0A1081.00 active...
Page 314: Displaying The Ilmi Interface Configuration
Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring an ILMI Interface Displaying the ILMI Interface Configuration To show the ILMI interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm ilmi-status atm card/subcard/port Shows the ILMI configuration on a per-port basis. Example The following example displays the ILMI status for ATM interface 3/0/0: Switch# show atm ilmi-status atm 3/0/0 Interface : ATM3/0/0 Interface Type : Private NNI...
Page 315: Displaying Atm Address Group Configuration
Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring an ILMI Interface Displaying ATM Address Group Configuration To determine if an interface is a member of an ATM address group, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show running-config interface atm Shows the ILMI configuration on a per-port card/subcard/port basis.
Page 316 Chapter 10 Configuring ILMI Configuring an ILMI Interface ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 10-10 OL-7396-01...
Page 317: Overview
PNNI, a dynamic routing protocol. PNNI provides quality of service (QoS) routes to signaling based on the QoS requirements specified in the call setup request. The Cisco IOS Release 12.1(22)EB and later releases for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, Note...
Page 318: Chapter 11 Configuring Atm Routing And Pnni
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI IISP Configuration ATM Addresses The autoconfigured ATM address of the ATM switch router suffices when implementing single-level PNNI. Hierarchical PNNI requires an addressing scheme to ensure global uniqueness of the ATM address and to plan for future network expansion. For detailed discussions of the following related topics, refer to the Guide to ATM Technology: •...
Page 319: Displaying The Atm Routing Mode Configuration
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI IISP Configuration To configure the routing mode, perform these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# atm routing-mode static Configures the ATM routing mode to static. Step 2 Switch(config)# end Exits configuration mode.
Page 320: Configuring The Atm Address
If you are planning to implement only a flat topology network (and have no future plans to migrate to PNNI hierarchy), you can skip this section and use the preconfigured ATM address assigned by Cisco Systems. For information about ATM address considerations, see ATM Addresses, page 11-2.
Page 321: Displaying The Atm Address Configuration
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI IISP Configuration Switch(config)# atm address 47.0091.8100.5670.0000.0ca7.ce01... Switch(config)# no atm address 47.0091.8100.0000.0041.0b0a.1081... Displaying the ATM Address Configuration To display the ATM address configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm addresses Displays the ATM address configuration. Example The following example shows the ATM address configuration using the show atm addresses EXEC command:...
Page 322: Configuring Static Routes
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI IISP Configuration Configuring Static Routes Use the atm route command to configure a static route. A static route attached to an interface allows all ATM addresses matching the configured address prefix to be reached through that interface. For private User-Network Interface (UNI) interfaces where ILMI address registration is not used, Note internal-type static routes should be configured to a 19-byte address prefix representing the attached end...
Page 323: Configuring Atm Address Groups
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI IISP Configuration Examples The following example shows the ATM static route configuration using the show atm route privileged EXEC command: Switch# show atm route Codes: P - installing Protocol (S - Static, P - PNNI, R - Routing control), T - Type (I - Internal prefix, E - Exterior prefix, SE - Summary Exterior prefix, SI - Summary Internal prefix, ZE - Suppress Summary Exterior, ZI - Suppress Summary Internal)
Page 324: Displaying Atm Address Group Configuration
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI IISP Configuration Displaying ATM Address Group Configuration To determine if an interface is a member of an ATM address group, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show running-config interface atm Shows the ILMI configuration on a per-port card/subcard/port basis.
Page 325: Basic Pnni Configuration
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Basic PNNI Configuration This section describes all the procedures necessary for a basic PNNI configuration and includes the following subsections: Configuring PNNI without Hierarchy, page 11-9 • Configuring the Lowest Level of the PNNI Hierarchy, page 11-9 •...
Page 326 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration To change the active ATM address you must create a new address, verify that it exists, and then delete the current active address. After you have entered the new ATM address, disable node 1 and then reenable it.
Page 327: Configuring Static Routes
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Displaying the PNNI Node Configuration To display the ATM PNNI node configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni local-node Displays the ATM PNNI node configuration. Example The following example shows the PNNI node configuration using the show atm pnni local-node privileged EXEC command:...
Page 328 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration To configure a static route connection, use the following global configuration command: Command Purpose atm route addr-prefix atm card/subcard/port Specifies a static route to a reachable address [e164-address address-string [number-type prefix.
Page 329: Configuring A Summary Address
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Configuring a Summary Address You can configure summary addresses to reduce the amount of information advertised by a PNNI node and contribute to scalability in large networks. Each summary address consists of a single reachable address prefix that represents a collection of end system or node addresses.
Page 330: Configuring Scope Mapping
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Displaying the Summary Address Configuration To display the ATM PNNI summary address configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni summary Displays a summary of the PNNI hierarchy. Example The following example shows the ATM PNNI summary address configuration using the show atm pnni summary privileged EXEC command:...
Page 331 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Table 11-1 Scope Mapping Table Organizational ATM Forum PNNI 1.0 Automatic Mode PNNI Scope Default Level Level 1 to 3 Minimum (l,96) 4 to 5 Minimum (l,80) 6 to 7 Minimum (l,72) 8 to 10 Minimum (l,64)
Page 332: Configuring Higher Levels Of The Pnni Hierarchy
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Displaying the Scope Mapping Configuration To display the PNNI scope mapping configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni scope Displays the node PNNI scope mapping configuration.
Page 333 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration To configure a LGN and peer group identifier, perform these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# atm router pnni Enters ATM router PNNI mode. Switch(config-atm-router)# Step 2 Switch(config-atm-router)# node node-index Configures the logical node and optionally its...
Page 334: Configuring The Node Name
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows the PNNI node information using the show atm pnni local-node privileged EXEC command: Switch# show atm pnni local-node 2 PNNI node 2 is enabled and not running Node name: Switch.2.56 System address 47.009181000000000000000001.000000000001.02...
Page 335: Configuring A Parent Node
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Example Configure the name of the node as eng_1 using the name command, as in the following example: Switch(config)# atm router pnni Switch(config-atm-router)# node 1 Switch(config-pnni-node)# name eng_1 Displaying the Node Name Configuration To display the ATM PNNI node name configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 336: Configuring The Node Election Leadership Priority
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration To configure a parent node, perform these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# atm router pnni Enters ATM router PNNI mode. Switch(config-atm-router)# Step 2 Switch(config-atm-router)# node node-index Enters node configuration mode.
Page 337 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration The control for election is done through the assignment of leadership priorities. We recommend that the leadership priority space be divided into three tiers: First tier: 1 to 49 • Second tier: 100 to 149 •...
Page 338: Configuring A Summary Address
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Displaying Node Election Leadership Priority To display the node election leadership priority, use one of the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show atm pnni election Displays the node election leadership priority. show atm pnni election peers Displays all nodes in the peer group.
Page 339 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Summary addresses other than defaults must be explicitly configured on each node. A node can have multiple summary address prefixes. Note also that every node in a peer group that has a potential to become a peer group leader (PGL) should have the same summary address lists in its parent node configuration.
Page 340: Pnni Hierarchy Configuration Example
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows the ATM PNNI summary address configuration using the show atm pnni summary privileged EXEC command: Switch# show atm pnni summary Codes: Node - Node index advertising this summary Type - Summary type (INT - internal, EXT - exterior) - Suppressed flag (Y - Yes, N - No) Auto - Auto Summary flag (Y - Yes, N - No)
Page 341 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration lowest level, switches T4 and T3 become leaders of their peer groups. Therefore, each switch creates an LGN at the second level (level 64) of the hierarchy. As a result of the election at the second level of the hierarchy, logical group nodes (LGNs) SanFran.BldA and NewYork.BldB are elected as PGLs, creating LGNs at the highest level of the hierarchy (level 56).
Page 342 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Node name: NewYork.BldB System address 47.009144556677114410111244.00603E5BBC01.02 Node ID 64:72:47.009144556677114400000000.00603E5BBC01.00 Peer group ID 64:47.0091.4455.6677.1100.0000.0000 Level 64, Priority 40 40, No. of interfaces 0, No. of neighbors 0 Parent Node Index: 3 <information deleted>...
Page 343 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Parent Node Index: NONE <information deleted> Switch SanFran.BldA.T4 Configuration hostname SanFran.BldA.T4 atm address 47.0091.4455.6677.2233.1011.1266.0060.3e7b.2001.00 atm router pnni node 1 level 72 lowest parent 2 redistribute atm-static election leadership-priority 45 node 2 level 64 parent 3 election leadership-priority 45 name SanFran.BldA...
Page 344 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Basic PNNI Configuration Switch SanFran.BldA.T5 Configuration hostname SanFran.BldA.T5 atm address 47.0091.4455.6677.2233.1011.1244.0060.3e7b.2401.00 atm router pnni node 1 level 72 lowest parent 2 redistribute atm-static election leadership-priority 10 node 2 level 64 parent 3 election leadership-priority 40 name SanFran.BldA node 3 level 56 name SanFran...
Page 345: Advanced Pnni Configuration
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Advanced PNNI Configuration This section describes how to configure advanced PNNI features. The advanced features described in this section are not required to enable PNNI, but are provided to tune your network performance. For additional information about the features described in this section, refer to the Guide to ATM Technology.
Page 346 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows how to enable background routes and configures the background routes poll interval to 30 seconds: Switch(config)# atm router pnni Switch(config-atm-router)# background-routes-enable poll-interval 30 Displaying the Background Route Computation Configuration To display the background route configuration, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose...
Page 347: Configuring Link Selection
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Background Routes From CBR/CTD Table ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 2 Routes To Node 2 1. Hops 1. 1:ATM0/1/2 -> 2 ->: aw 5040 cdv 138 ctd 154 acr 147743 clr0 10 clr01 10 <-: aw 5040 cdv 138 ctd 154 acr 147743 clr0 10 clr01 10...
Page 348 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration 1. CBR = constant bit rate 2. VBR-RT = variable bit rate real time 3. VBR-NRT = variable bit rate non-real time 4. ABR = available bit rate 5. UBR = unspecified bit rate The switch applies a single link selection method for a group of parallel links connected to a neighbor switch.
Page 349: Configuring The Maximum Administrative Weight Percentage
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows the detailed PNNI link selection configuration using the show atm pnni neighbor EXEC command: Switch# show atm pnni neighbor Neighbors For Node (Index 1, Level 56) Neighbor Name: XXXXXX, Node number: 9 Neighbor Node Id: 56:160:47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB401.00 Neighboring Peer State: Full...
Page 350: Configuring The Precedence
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Displaying the Maximum Administrative Weight Percentage Configuration To display the node ATM PNNI maximum AW percentage configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni local-node Displays the node ATM PNNI maximum AW configuration.
Page 351 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration To configure the precedence of reachable addresses, perform these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# atm router pnni Enters ATM router PNNI mode. Switch(config-atm-router)# Step 2 Switch(config-atm-router)# precedence Enters PNNI precedence and configure the PNNI [pnni-remote-exterior value |...
Page 352: Configuring Explicit Paths
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Configuring Explicit Paths The explicit path feature enables you to manually configure either a fully specified or partially specified path for routing soft permanent virtual channels (soft PVC) and soft permanent virtual path (soft PVP) connections.
Page 353 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Node IDs can be entered either with the full 22-byte length address or as a Node ID prefix with a length of 15 or more bytes. To specify routes that include higher level nodes (parent LGNs) for other peer groups, we recommend that you enter exactly 15 bytes so that the address remains valid in the event of a PGL update.
Page 354 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Editing Entries within the Explicit Path Each entry has an index that gives its relative position within the list. Indices are used as an aid to edit an explicit path. The entire current list showing the entry index displays after each entry is added, or it is redisplayed when you use the list keyword.
Page 355: Tuning Topology Attributes
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Switch# show atm pnni explicit-paths Summary of configured Explicit Paths: PathId Status UpTo Routable AdminWt Explicit Path Name ~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ enabled 10040 dallas_4.path1 enabled 15120 chicago_2.path1 enabled 10080 chicago_2.path2...
Page 356: Configuring Administrative Weight Per Interface
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows how to configure the administrative weight for the node as line speed: Switch(config)# atm router pnni Switch(config-atm-router)# administrative-weight linespeed Displaying the Administrative Weight Mode Configuration To display the administrative weight configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 357: Configuring Transit Restriction
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Displaying the Administrative Weight Per Interface Configuration To display the ATM PNNI interface AW configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni [interface atm Displays the interface ATM PNNI AW card/subcard/port] [detail] configuration.
Page 358: Configuring Redistribution
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Command Purpose show atm pnni local-node Displays the ATM configuration. Example The following example shows the ATM PNNI transit-restriction configuration using the show atm pnni local-node privileged EXEC command: Switch# show atm pnni local-node PNNI node 1 is enabled and running Node name: Switch System address 47.00918100000000400B0A3081.00400B0A3081.00...
Page 359: Configuring Aggregation Token
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows how to enable redistribution of static routes: Switch(config)# atm router pnni Switch(config-atm-router)# node 1 Switch(config-pnni-node)# redistribute atm-static Displaying the Redistribution Configuration To display the node redistribution configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni local-node...
Page 360 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration To specify an aggregation token value, perform these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Specifies the ATM interface. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# atm pnni aggregation-token Enters a value for the aggregation-token on the value ATM interface.
Page 361: Configuring Aggregation Mode
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Common peer group ID 56:47.0091.4455.6677.0000.0000.0000 Upnode ID 56:72:47.009144556677223300000000.00603E7B2001.00 Upnode Address 47.009144556677223310111266.00603E7B2001.02 Upnode number: 11 Upnode Name: SanFran NewYork.BldB.T3# Configuring Aggregation Mode You configure the aggregation mode for calculating metrics and attributes for aggregated PNNI links and nodes advertised to higher PNNI levels.
Page 362: Configuring Significant Change Thresholds
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Examples The following example shows the link aggregation mode: Switch# show atm pnni aggregation link PNNI PGL link aggregation for local-node 2 (level=72, name=Switch.2.72) Configured aggregation modes (per service class): VBR-RT VBR-NRT ~~~~~~~~~~~...
Page 363 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration To configure the PTSE significant change threshold, take these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# atm router pnni Enters ATM router PNNI mode. Switch(config-atm-router)# Step 2 Switch(config-atm-router)# node node-index Enters node configuration mode.
Page 364: Configuring The Complex Node Representation For Lgns
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Configuring the Complex Node Representation for LGNs By default, higher-level logical group nodes (LGNs) represent their child peer groups (PGs) in the simple node representation. With simple node representation, the entire peer group is represented as a single node.
Page 365: Tuning Protocol Parameters
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows the PNNI complex node configuration: Switch# show atm pnni aggregation node PNNI nodal aggregation for local-node 2 (level=56, child PG level=60) Complex node representation, exception threshold: 60% Configured nodal aggregation modes (per service class): VBR-RT VBR-NRT...
Page 366 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(config-pnni-node)# timer [ack-delay Configures Hello database synchronization and tenths-of-second] flooding parameters. [hello-holddown tenths-of-second] [hello-interval seconds] [inactivity-factor number] [retransmit-interval seconds] Step 4 Switch(config-pnni-node)# ptse [lifetime-factor Configure PTSE significant change percent percentage-factor] [min-ptse-interval number.
Page 367: Configuring The Resource Management Poll Interval
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows the ATM PNNI Hello, database synchronization, and flooding configuration using the show atm pnni local-node privileged EXEC command: Switch# show atm pnni local-node PNNI node 1 is enabled and running Node name: Switch System address 47.00918100000000400B0A3081.00400B0A3081.00 Node ID 56:160:47.00918100000000400B0A3081.00400B0A3081.00...
Page 368: Configuring Atm Pnni Statistics Collection
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Advanced PNNI Configuration Displaying the Resource Management Poll Interval Configuration To display the resource management poll interval configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni resource-info Displays the resource management poll interval configuration.
Page 369: Displaying Atm Pnni Statistics
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Mobile PNNI Configuration Example The following example shows how to enable PNNI ATM statistics gathering: Switch(config)# atm router pnni Switch(config-atm-router)# statistics call Displaying ATM PNNI Statistics To display the ATM PNNI statistics, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm pnni statistics call...
Page 370: Connecting Mobile Pnni Networks To Fixed Pnni Networks
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Mobile PNNI Configuration A border node of the mobile network may have one or more active mobile outside links to one or more access point switches. The border node uses one of the nodal hierarchy lists (NHL) received from the access point switches to build an outside nodal hierarchy list (ONHL) that contains a list of the host peer groups available at the access point switch.
Page 371 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Mobile PNNI Configuration Command Purpose Step 1 Switch# configure terminal Enters global configuration mode. Switch(config)# Step 2 Switch(config)# atm router pnni Enters PNNI configuration mode. Switch(config-atm-router)# Step 3 Switch(config-atm-router)# node node-number Designates node-umber node as a mobile logical mobile group node.
Page 372: Displaying Mobile Pnni Operational Details
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI Mobile PNNI Configuration Node name: T3.2.72 System address 47.009144556677114410173322.00603E899901.02 Node ID 72:96:47.009144556677114410173300.00603E899901.00 Peer group ID 72:47.0091.3333.3333.3333.0000.0000 Level 72, Priority 0 0, No. of interfaces 0, No. of neighbors 1 Parent Node Index: NONE Node Allows Transit Calls Node Representation: simple Hello interval 15 sec, inactivity factor 5,...
Page 373: Configuring A Limit For The Onhl
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace Cfgd highest join level : 0 (default) Cfgd default peer group ID: Not configured Mobile LGN host PG joined?: Yes Mobile LGN's joined PG ID : 72:47.0091.3333.3333.3333.0000.0000 Configuring a Limit for the ONHL You can optionally specify the highest PNNI hierarchy level to be advertised in the NHL.
Page 374: Initiating A Connection Trace
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace (TTL) information element (IE). When a trace connection is triggered, the trace source node originates a trace connection message. This message contains the TTL IE. Each switch receiving this message appends its own connection information to the TTL IE and forwards it to the next connection on the interface;...
Page 375 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace It is not possible to initiate traces from CES interfaces. Note Figure 11-2 shows an SVC transiting switches 1, 2, and 3. This could happen when NPI-1 and NPI-2 are ATM UNI interfaces connecting the switches to routers.
Page 376 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace Figure 11-3 SVC with Connection Trace Initiated from I2 on Switch 2 SW-1 SW-2 SW-3 NPI-1 NPI-2 NNI-A NNI-B If the direction of the trace is chosen as outgoing from switch 2, the trace returns the following information: •...
Page 377: Displaying The Connection Trace Output
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace Example Figure 11-4 is an example of an ATM PNNI network used to display the trace connection initialization. Figure 11-4 PNNI Connection Trace Network Example Switch_3 Switch_6 Switch_5 Router_2 Switch_8 Switch_9 Switch_10 Router_1...
Page 378 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace Examples The following example shows an active PNNI connection trace summary for the connections shown in Figure 11-4: Switch_10# show atm pnni trace connection 20 Connection Trace Request-index: 20 Connection Type: ATM-VC Source Interface: ATM1/0/2 Direction:...
Page 379 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace The hex-only keyword indicates the nodes the connection trace traversed and the interface numbers of Note the outgoing port in hexadecimal mode. The PNNI address listed under the Node heading indicates the nodes the connection trace traversed. Note The hexadecimal numbers under the Outgoing-port heading indicate the outgoing port of each node.
Page 380: Displaying Pnni Connection Trace Configuration
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace Displaying PNNI Connection Trace Configuration This section describes how to display active PNNI connection trace configuration. To display the active PNNI connection trace configuration, use the following command: Command Purpose show atm pnni trace info Displays the PNNI connection trace configuration.
Page 381: Designating Pnni Trace Boundaries
Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace You can modify the maximum number of concurrent PNNI connection traces by using the atm pnni Note trace max-concurrent global configuration command. The range is 1 to 100. You can modify the maximum size of the PNNI trace transit list (TTL) information elements (IEs) by Note using the atm pnni trace transit-list max-size global configuration command.
Page 382 Chapter 11 Configuring ATM Routing and PNNI PNNI Connection Trace ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 11-66 OL-7396-01...
Page 383: Access Control Overview
C H A P T E R Using Access Control This chapter describes how to configure and maintain access control lists, which are used to permit or deny incoming calls or outgoing calls on an interface of the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 384: Configuring A Template Alias
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring a Template Alias During initial configuration, perform the following steps to use access control to filter setup messages: Create a template alias allowing you to use real names instead of ATM addresses in your ATM filter Step 1 expressions.
Page 385: Chapter 12 Using Acces Control
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring ATM Filter Sets Displaying the Template Alias Configuration To display template alias configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose more system:running-config Displays the current configuration. Example The following example shows the template aliases configured in the previous examples using the more system:running-config privileged EXEC command: Switch# more system:running-config Building configuration...
Page 386 Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring ATM Filter Sets Switch(config)# atm filter-set filter_2 deny 47.0000.8100.5678.0003.c386.b301.0003.c386.b301.00 Switch(config)# atm filter-set filter_2 permit default The following example creates a filter named filter_3 that denies access to all ATM addresses that begin with the prefix 47.840F, but permits all other calls: Switch(config)# atm filter-set filter_3 deny 47.840F...
Page 387: Deleting Filter Sets
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring an ATM Filter Expression Deleting Filter Sets To delete an ATM filter set, use the following command in global configuration mode: Command Purpose no atm filter-set name [index number] Deletes a global ATM address filter set. Example The following example shows how to display and delete filter sets: Switch# show atm filter-set...
Page 388: Configuring Atm Interface Access Control
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring ATM Interface Access Control Examples The following example defines a simple filter expression that has only one term and no operators: Switch(config)# atm filter-expr training filter_1 The following example defines a filter expression using the operator not: Switch(config)# atm filter-expr training not filter_1 The following example defines a filter expression using the operator or: Switch(config)# atm filter-expr training filter_2 or filter_1...
Page 389: Displaying Atm Filter Configuration
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring ATM Interface Access Control Displaying ATM Filter Configuration To display access control configuration, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show atm filter-set [name] Displays a specific or a summary of ATM filter set. show atm filter-expr [detail] name Displays a specific or a summary of ATM filter expression.
Page 390: Atm Filter Configuration Scenario
Chapter 12 Using Access Control ATM Filter Configuration Scenario ATM Filter Configuration Scenario This section provides a complete access filter configuration example using the information described in the preceding sections. The example network configuration used in the following filter set configuration scenario is shown in Figure 12-1.
Page 391: Filtering Ip Packets At The Ip Interfaces
IP packet filtering helps control packet movement through the network. Such control can help limit network traffic and restrict network use by certain users or devices. To permit or deny packets from crossing specified IP interfaces, Cisco provides access lists. You can use access lists for the following reasons: Control the transmission of packets on an IP interface •...
Page 392 Chapter 12 Using Access Control Filtering IP Packets at the IP Interfaces Extended IP access lists use source and destination addresses for matching operations, as well as • optional protocol type information for increased control. Dynamic extended IP access lists grant access per user to a specific source or destination host •...
Page 393: Applying An Ip Access List To An Interface Or Terminal Line
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Filtering IP Packets at the IP Interfaces Applying an IP Access List to an Interface or Terminal Line After you create an access list, you can apply it to one or more interfaces. Access lists can be applied on either outbound or inbound interfaces.
Page 394: Ip Access List Examples
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Filtering IP Packets at the IP Interfaces IP Access List Examples In the following example, network 36.0.0.0 is a Class A network whose second octet specifies a subnet; that is, its subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. The third and fourth octets of a network 36.0.0.0 address specify a particular host.
Page 395: Configuring Per-Interface Address Registration With Optional Access Filters
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring Per-Interface Address Registration with Optional Access Filters Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 128.88.0.0 0.0.255.255 gt 1023 Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 128.88.1.2 0.0.0.0 eq 25 Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit icmp 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 128.88.0.0 255.255.255.255 Switch(config)# interface ethernet0 Switch(config-if)# ip access-group 102 in As another example, suppose you have a network connected to the Internet, and you want any host on...
Page 396: Displaying The Ilmi Access Filter Configuration
Chapter 12 Using Access Control Configuring Per-Interface Address Registration with Optional Access Filters Displaying the ILMI Access Filter Configuration To display the interface ILMI address registration access filter configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose more system:running-config Displays the interface ILMI address registration access filter configuration.
Page 397: Configuring Classical Ip Over Atm
C H A P T E R Configuring IP over ATM This chapter describes how to configure IP over ATM on the ATM switch router. The primary use of IP over ATM is for inband management of the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 398: Chapter 13 Configuring Ip Over Atm
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Configuring Classical IP over ATM The ATM switch router can be configured as an ATM ARP client to work with any ATM ARP server conforming to RFC 1577. Alternatively, one of the ATM switch routers in a logical IP subnet (LIS) can be configured to act as the ATM ARP server itself.
Page 399 Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Configuring Classical IP over ATM NSAP Address Example Figure 13-1 shows three ATM switch routers and a router connected using classical IP over ATM. Figure 13-1 Classical IP over ATM Connection Setup Switch client B Router client C 123.233.45.3 123.233.45.6...
Page 400: Configuring As An Atm Arp Server
Configuring Classical IP over ATM Configuring as an ATM ARP Server Cisco’s implementation of the ATM ARP server supports a single, nonredundant server per LIS and one ATM ARP server per subinterface. Thus, a single ATM switch router can support multiple ARP servers by using multiple interfaces.
Page 401: Displaying The Ip-Over-Atm Interface Configuration
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Configuring Classical IP over ATM Example The following example configures the route processor interface ATM 0 as an ARP server (shown in Figure 13-1): ARP_Server(config)# interface atm 0 ARP_Server(config-if)# atm esi-address 0041.0b0a.1081.00 ARP_Server(config-if)# atm arp-server self ARP_Server(config-if)# ip address 123.233.45.2 255.255.255.0 Client A(config)# atm route 47.0091.8100.0000.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111 atm 0 internal Displaying the IP-over-ATM Interface Configuration...
Page 402: Displaying The Ip-Over-Atm Interface Configuration
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Configuring Classical IP over ATM In a PVC environment, configure the ATM InARP mechanism by performing the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm 0 Selects the route processor interface. Switch(config-if)# Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port If you are using the optional ATM router module,...
Page 403: Mapping A Protocol Address To A Pvc Using Static Map Lists
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Mapping a Protocol Address to a PVC Using Static Map Lists Example The following example displays the map-list configuration of the static map and IP-over-ATM interfaces: Switch# show atm map Map list yyy : PERMANENT ip 1.1.1.2 maps to VPI=0 VCI=200 Map list zzz : PERMANENT Map list a : PERMANENT...
Page 404 Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Mapping a Protocol Address to a PVC Using Static Map Lists Command Purpose Step 4 Switch(config-if)# atm pvc vpi-a vci-a [upc upc] Configures the PVC. [pd pd] [rx-cttr index] [tx-cttr index] interface atm card/subcard/port[.vpt#] vpi-b vci-b [upc upc] [encap aal-encap] Step 5 Switch(config-if)# exit...
Page 405: Displaying The Map-List Interface Configuration
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Mapping a Protocol Address to a PVC Using Static Map Lists Displaying the Map-List Interface Configuration To show the map-list interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm map Shows the ATM interface map-list configuration.
Page 406: Displaying The Map-List Interface Configuration
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Mapping a Protocol Address to a PVC Using Static Map Lists Examples Figure 13-3 illustrates an SVC connection configured with a map list. Figure 13-3 SVC Map-List Configuration Example Switch IF# = main-atm0 1.1.1.2 NSAP address = 47.0091.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.1111.00 IF# = 1/0 Backbone...
Page 407: Policy-Based Routing
For more information on policy-based routing, including configuration examples, refer to the Cisco IOS Quality of Service Solutions Configuration Guide, Release 12.1. Policy-Based Routing Restrictions...
Page 408 Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Policy-Based Routing The following commands are not supported: • set ip default next-hop – set ip default interface – When you configure a policy to rewrite precedence with a next hop interface, the precedence is •...
Page 409: Configuring Ip Load Sharing
Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Configuring IP Load Sharing Configuring IP Load Sharing Load sharing allows a device to distribute the outgoing and incoming traffic among multiple best paths to a particular destination. In per packet load sharing, each packet is distributed among multiple best paths to the destination.
Page 410 Chapter 13 Configuring IP over ATM Configuring IP Load Sharing Command Purpose Step 2 Switch(config-if)# exit Exits interface configuration mode. Step 3 Switch(config)# epc xpif-ip-per-pack-all Enables per packet load sharing for all IP traffic for interface enabled with the ip load-sharing per-packet enable command.
Page 411: Lane Functionality And Requirements
Guide to ATM Technology. For complete descriptions of the commands mentioned in this chapter, refer to the ATM Switch Router Command Reference publication. For a detailed description of LANE and its components, refer to Cisco IOS Switching Services Configuration Guide: Virtual LANs.
Page 412: Chapter 14 Configuring Lan Emulation
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Figure 14-1 illustrates the various connections LANE provides. Figure 14-1 LANE Concept LAN switch LAN switch with ATM LANE with ATM LANE switch network ATM end station (server with ATM NIC) Router with ATM interface Refer to the Guide to ATM Technology for the following background topics on LANE: How LANE works—the operation of LANE and the function of ATM network devices in LANE...
Page 413: Creating A Lane Plan And Worksheet
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks To configure LANE, complete the tasks in the following sections: Creating a LANE Plan and Worksheet, page 14-3 • Displaying LANE Default Addresses, page 14-6 • Entering the ATM Address of the Configuration Server, page 14-7 •...
Page 414: Rules For Assigning Components To Interfaces And Subinterfaces
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks You can use ATM address templates in many LANE commands that assign ATM addresses to LANE components or that link client ATM addresses to emulated LANs. Using templates can greatly simplify the use of these commands. E.164-format ATM addresses do not support the use of LANE ATM address templates.
Page 415: Example Lane Plan And Worksheet
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Example LANE Plan and Worksheet This section is an example of the LANE plan and worksheet that would be created for the example network configuration described in Default Configuration for a Single Emulated LAN, page 14-17.
Page 416: Displaying Lane Default Addresses
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks —ELAN name: eng_elan —Default ELAN name: eng_elan —ATM address: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB403.01 • LANE Client: —Location: ATM_Switch —Interface/Subinterface: atm 0.1 —Server/BUS name: eng_elan —IP Address/Subnet mask: 172.16.0.4 255.255.0.0 —Type: Ethernet LANE Client: • —Location: Switch_1 —Interface/Subinterface: atm 0.1 —Server/BUS name: eng_elan —Type: Ethernet...
Page 417: Entering The Atm Address Of The Configuration Server
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Entering the ATM Address of the Configuration Server You must enter the configuration server ATM address into the ATM switch routers and save it permanently, so that the value is not lost when the device is reset or powered off. The configuration server address can be specified for all of the ATM switch routers, or per port.
Page 418: Setting Up The Database For Unrestricted-Membership Emulated Lans
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks To set up the LECS for the default emulated LAN, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# lane database database-name Creates a named database for the LECS. Switch(lane-config-database)# Step 2 Switch(lane-config-database)# name elan-name...
Page 419: Setting Up The Database For Restricted-Membership Emulated Lans
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Command Purpose Step 4 Switch(lane-config-database)# name elan-name2 In the configuration database, binds the name of server-atm-address atm-address [index n] the second emulated LAN to the ATM address of the LES. Repeat this step, providing a different emulated LAN name and an ATM address, for each additional emulated LAN in this switch cloud.
Page 420: Enabling The Configuration Server
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(lane-config-database)# name elan-name1 (Token Ring only) In the configuration database, local-seg-id seg-num specifies the ring number for the first emulated LAN. (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Step 4 Switch(lane-config-database)# name elan-name2 In the configuration database, binds the name of server-atm-address atm-address [index n]...
Page 421: Setting Up Less And Clients
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks To enable the configuration server, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm 0[.subinterface# If you are not currently configuring the interface, [multipoint]] specifies the major ATM interface where the configuration server is located.
Page 422: Setting Up The Server, Bus, And A Client On A Subinterface
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Setting Up the Server, BUS, and a Client on a Subinterface To set up the server, BUS, and (optionally) clients for an emulated LAN, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 423: Configuring A Lan Emulation Client On The Atm Switch Router
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks To set up a client for an emulated LAN, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm 0.subinterface# Specifies the route processor subinterface [multipoint] number for an emulated LAN on this router.
Page 424: Configuring An Ethernet Lane Client
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks This connection can be used for switch router management only. Note A route processor (or optional ATM router module interface) configured as a LANE client allows you to configure the ATM switch router from a remote host. Configuring an Ethernet LANE Client To configure the route processor interface (or optional ATM router module interface on the Catalyst 8540 MSR) as an Ethernet LANE client on the ATM switch router, perform the following steps,...
Page 425: Configuring Fault-Tolerant Operation
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Configuring Fault-Tolerant Operation The LANE simple server redundancy feature creates fault tolerance using standard LANE protocols and mechanisms. If a failure occurs on the LECS or on the LES/BUS, the emulated LAN can continue to operate using the services of a backup LES.
Page 426: Monitoring And Maintaining The Lane Components
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Tasks Caution You can override the LECS address on any subinterface by using the lane auto-config-atm-address, lane fixed-config-atm-address, and lane config-atm-address commands. When you perform an override using one of these commands, however, fault-tolerant operation cannot be guaranteed. To avoid affecting the fault-tolerant operation, do not override any LECS, LES, or BUS addresses.
Page 427: Lane Configuration Examples
“Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces.” Default Configuration for a Single Emulated LAN The following examples show how to configure one Cisco 7505 router, one ATM switch, and one Catalyst 5500 switch for a single emulated LAN. Configurations for both Ethernet and Token Ring emulated LANs are shown.
Page 428: Ethernet Example
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Ethernet Example ATM Switch ATM_Switch# show lane default-atm-addresses interface ATM13/0/0: LANE Client: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB402.** LANE Server: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB403.** LANE Bus: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB404.** LANE Config Server: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB405.00 note: ** is the subinterface number byte in hex ATM_Switch# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Page 429 Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples ATM_Switch# show lane LE Config Server ATM13/0/0 config table: eng_dbase Admin: up State: operational LECS Mastership State: active master list of global LECS addresses (46 seconds to update): 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB405.00 <-------- me ATM Address of this LECS: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB405.00 (auto) rxCnt txCnt callingParty...
Page 430 Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Router 1 router1# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. router1(config)# interface atm 3/0 router1(config-if)# atm pvc 1 0 5 qsaal router1(config-if)# atm pvc 2 0 16 ilmi router1(config-if)# interface atm 3/0.1 router1(config-subif)# ip address 172.16.0.1 255.255.0.0 router1(config-subif)# lane client ethernet eng_elan...
Page 431: Confirming Connectivity Between The Atm Switch And Other Lane Members
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Catalyst 5500 Switch 1 Switch1> session 4 Trying ATM-4... Connected to ATM-4. Escape character is '^]'. ATM> enable ATM# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. ATM(config)# interface atm 0 ATM(config-if)# lane server-bus ethernet eng_elan ATM(config-if)# end ATM# copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config...
Page 432 Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples ATM Switch Switch# show lane LE Config Server ATM13/0/0 config table: eng_dbase Admin: up State: operational LECS Mastership State: active master list of global LECS addresses (31 seconds to update): 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB405.00 <-------- me ATM Address of this LECS: 47.00918100000000E04FACB401.00E04FACB405.00 (auto) rxCnt txCnt...
Page 433: Token Ring Example (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Token Ring Example (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) In this Token Ring example, the Cisco 7505 router contains the LECS, LES, BUS, and an LEC. The ATM switch router and Catalyst 5500 Fast Ethernet switch each contain an LEC for the emulated LAN. This example uses all LANE default settings.
Page 434: Confirming Connectivity Between The Atm Switch And The Routers
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Catalyst 5000 Switch 1 Switch1> session 4 Trying ATM-4... Connected to ATM-4. Escape character is '^]'. ATM> enable ATM# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. ATM(config)# interface atm 0 ATM(config-if)# lane server-bus tokenring eng_elan ATM(config-if)# end ATM# copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config...
Page 435: Displaying The Lane Client Configuration On The Atm Switch
Default Configuration for a Single Emulated LAN with Backup LECS and LES on the ATM Switch Router The following examples show how to configure two Cisco 4500 routers and one ATM switch router for one emulated LAN with fault tolerance. Configurations for both Ethernet and Token Ring emulated LANs are shown.
Page 436: Ethernet Example
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Figure 14-4 Single Emulated LAN with Backup LANE Example Network Router 1 Configuration server BUS server client 172.16.0.1 172.16.0.0 maIn-atm 0.1 172.16.0.4 172.16.0.3 Router 2 ATM client switch client Backup server client This example shows how to accept all default settings provided.
Page 437 Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Router 1 router1# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. router1(config)# lane database example1 router1(lane-config-database)# name eng server-atm-address 47.00918100000000603E7B2001.00000C407573.01 router1(lane-config-database)# name eng server-atm-address 47.00918100000000603E7B2001.00603E7B2003.01 router1(lane-config-database)# default-name eng router1(lane-config-database)# exit router1(config)# interface atm 3/0 router1(config-if)# atm pvc 1 0 5 qsaal router1(config-if)# atm pvc 2 0 16 ilmi...
Page 438: Token Ring Example (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Router 2 router2# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. router2(config)# interface atm 3/0 router2(config-if)# atm pvc 1 0 5 qsaal router2(config-if)# atm pvc 2 0 16 ilmi router2(config-if)# interface atm 3/0.2 router2(config-subif)# ip address 172.16.0.3 255.255.0.0 router2(config-subif)# lane client ethernet eng...
Page 439 Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Router 1 router1# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. router1(config)# lane database example1 router1(lane-config-database)# name eng server-atm-address 47.00918100000000603E7B2001.00000C407573.01 router1(lane-config-database)# name eng server-atm-address 47.00918100000000603E7B2001.00603E7B2003.01 router1(lane-config-database)# name eng local-seg-id 2048 router1(lane-config-database)# default-name eng router1(lane-config-database)# exit router1(config)# interface atm 3/0...
Page 440: Displaying The Lecs Configuration On The Atm Switch Router
Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples Router 2 router2# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. router2(config)# interface atm 3/0 router2(config-if)# atm pvc 1 0 5 qsaal router2(config-if)# atm pvc 2 0 16 ilmi router2(config-if)# interface atm 3/0.2 router2(config-subif)# ip address 172.16.0.3 255.255.0.0 router2(config-subif)# lane client tokenring eng...
Page 441: Default Configuration For A Token Ring Elan With Ip Source Routing (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
(Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) The following example shows how to configure a single emulated Token Ring LAN using a Cisco 4500 router and an ATM switch with IP source routing across a source-route bridged network. In this example, the emulated Token Ring LAN is source-route bridged to two physical Token Rings.
Page 442 Chapter 14 Configuring LAN Emulation LANE Configuration Examples ATM Switch Switch# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Switch(config)# atm lecs-address-default 47.00918100000000603E7B2001.00000C407575.00 Switch(config)# end Switch# Router router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. router(config)# lane database example1 router(lane-config-database)# name eng server-atm-address 47.00918100000000603E7B2001.00000C407573.01...
Page 443: Configuring Atm Accounting
C H A P T E R Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP This chapter describes the ATM accounting, Remote Monitoring (RMON), and SNMP features used with the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 444: C H A P T E R 15 Configuring Atm Accounting, Rmon, And Snmp
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting ATM Accounting Overview The ATM accounting feature provides accounting and billing services for virtual circuits (VCs) used on the ATM switch router. You enable ATM accounting on an edge switch to monitor call setup and traffic activity.
Page 445: Configuring Global Atm Accounting
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Figure 15-2 Interface and File Management for ATM Accounting Filter TFTP Interface File DRAM selection out to control control control host 5MB buffer 0/0/0 File SVC-IN 1/0/0 SVC-OUT 5MB buffer SVP-IN 3/0/0 SVP-OUT...
Page 446: Enabling Atm Accounting On An Interface
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Enabling ATM Accounting on an Interface After you enable ATM accounting, you must configure specific ingress or egress interfaces, usually on edge switches connected to the external network, to start gathering the ATM accounting data. To enable ATM accounting on a specific interface, perform the following tasks, beginning in global configuration mode: Command...
Page 447: Configuring The Atm Accounting Selection Table
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Configuring the ATM Accounting Selection Table The ATM accounting selection table determines the connection data to be gathered from the ATM switch router. To configure the ATM accounting selection entries, perform the following tasks, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 448: Displaying Atm Accounting Selection Configuration
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Examples The following example shows how to change to ATM accounting selection configuration mode and add the SPVC originator connection type entry to selection entry 1: Switch(config)# atm accounting selection 1 Switch(config-acct-sel)# connection-types spvc-originator The following example shows how to change to ATM accounting selection configuration mode and reset the connection types for selection entry 1:...
Page 449: Configuring Atm Accounting Files
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Configuring ATM Accounting Files Direct the ATM accounting data being gathered from the configured selection control table to a specific ATM accounting file. To configure the ATM accounting files and change to ATM accounting file configuration mode, perform the following tasks, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 450: Displaying The Atm Accounting File Configuration
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting The following example shows how to enable ATM accounting file configuration mode for acctng_file1 to collect connection data every hour: Switch(config)# atm accounting file acctng_file1 Switch(config-acct-file)# interval 3600 Displaying the ATM Accounting File Configuration To display the ATM accounting status, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 451: Controlling Atm Accounting Data Collection
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Controlling ATM Accounting Data Collection To configure the behavior of the buffers used for ATM accounting collection, use the following command in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose atm accounting collection {collect-now | Configures the ATM accounting data swap} filename collection.
Page 452: Configuring Atm Accounting Snmp Traps
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Configuring ATM Accounting SNMP Traps You can configure SNMP traps to be generated when the ATM accounting file reaches a specified threshold. You can use these traps to alert you when a file is full and needs to be downloaded. Configuring ATM Accounting Trap Generation To configure ATM accounting SNMP traps, use the following command in global configuration mode: Command...
Page 453: Configuring Snmp Server For Atm Accounting
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Configuring SNMP Server for ATM Accounting To enable SNMP ATM accounting trap generation and specify an SNMP server, perform the following steps in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps Enables SNMP server ATM accounting trap atm-accounting...
Page 454: Using Tftp To Copy The Atm Accounting File
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Example The following example shows the SNMP server ATM accounting configuration using the more system:running-config privileged EXEC command: Switch# more system:running-config Building configuration... Current configuration: <information deleted> ip rcmd rcp-enable ip rcmd remote-host dplatz 171.69.194.9 dplatz ip rcmd remote-username dplatz atm template-alias byte_wise 47.9*f8.33...
Page 455: Configuring Remote Logging Of Atm Accounting Records
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM Accounting Configuring Remote Logging of ATM Accounting Records You can collect ATM accounting records to a remotely connected PC or UNIX workstation. You can use this method in place of, or in addition to, collecting ATM accounting records as a file into the switch’s memory.
Page 456: Configuring Atm Rmon
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM RMON The following example shows the remote logging configuration using the show atm accounting EXEC command: Switch# show atm accounting ATM Accounting Info: AdminStatus - UP; OperStatus : UP Trap Threshold - 90 percent (4500000 bytes) Interfaces: AT1/0/0 AT2/0/0...
Page 457: Configuring Port Select Groups
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM RMON The ATM-RMON agent uses the 64-bit version of each cell counter if 64-bit counter support is present in the SNMP master-agent library. Configuring Port Select Groups Previously, RMON allowed collection of connection information on a per-interface basis only. ATM RMON allows a group of ports to be configured as an aggregate.
Page 458: Displaying The Atm Rmon Port Select Group
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM RMON Displaying the ATM RMON Port Select Group To display the ATM RMON port select group statistics, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm rmon stats number Displays the ATM RMON port select group statistics.
Page 459: Enabling Atm Rmon Data Collection
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM RMON Examples The following example shows how to display the ATM RMON host configuration for port selection group 6 using the show atm rmon host command from user EXEC mode: Switch# show atm rmon host 6 PortSelGrp: 6 Collection: Enabled...
Page 460: Displaying The Atm Rmon Configuration
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM RMON Displaying the ATM RMON Configuration To display the ATM RMON configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose more system:running-config Displays the ATM RMON configuration. Example The following example shows the ATM RMON configuration using the more system:running-config privileged EXEC command: Switch# more system:running-config Building configuration...
Page 461: Displaying The Generated Rmon Events
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring ATM RMON Displaying the Generated RMON Events To display the generated RMON events, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show rmon events Displays generated RMON events. Example The following example shows the RMON events generated using the show rmon events EXEC command: Switch# show rmon events Event 1 is active, owned by nms_3...
Page 462: Snmp Overview
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring SNMP Command Purpose show rmon alarms events Displays RMON alarms. Example The following example shows the RMON alarms and events using the show rmon alarms events EXEC command: Switch# show rmon alarms events Event 1 is active, owned by nms 3 Description is test Event firing causes trap to community test, last fired 00:00:00...
Page 463: Configuring Snmp-Server Hosts
Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring SNMP The MIB is a virtual information storage area for network management information, which consists of collections of managed objects. For a detailed description of SNMP and SNMP configuration see the following IOS documents: Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) •...
Page 464 Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring SNMP Command Purpose Step 4 Switch(config)# snmp-server host host-addr traps [version Specifies the recipient of the trap message. For details {1 | 2c | 3 [auth | noauth | priv]}] groupname on the notification types available, see the description [notification-type] of this command in the ATM Switch Router Command...
Page 465: Configuring Interface Index Persistence
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.27 version 2c public Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.111 version 1 public Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.33 public The following example sends the SNMP traps to the host specified by the name myhost.cisco.com. The community string is defined as “comaccess”. Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps Switch(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com comaccess snmp...
Page 466 Chapter 15 Configuring ATM Accounting, RMON, and SNMP Configuring SNMP Command Purpose show snmp Used to show the status of communications between the SNMP agent and SNMP manager. Example The following example shows the SNMP configuration using the show snmp privileged EXEC command: Switch# show snmp 497 SNMP packets input...
Page 467: Tag Switching Overview
C H A P T E R Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS This chapter describes tag switching, a high-performance packet-forwarding technology that assigns tags to mulitprotocol frames for transport across packet- or cell-based networks. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 468: Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching And Mpl
The Catalyst 8540 MSR hardware requirements for tag switching include the following: The ATM switch router (used as a tag switch) • A tag edged router such as a Cisco 7000 Route Switch Processor (RSP) with an Optical Carrier 3 • (OC-3) ATM interface processor (AIP) installed Tag switching has the following software restrictions: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is the only routing protocol currently supported.
Page 469: Configuring A Loopback Interface
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching Configuring a VPI Range (Optional), page 16-6 • Configuring TDP Control Channels (Optional), page 16-8 • Configuring Tag Switching on VP Tunnels, page 16-9 • Connecting the VP Tunnels, page 16-11 •...
Page 470: Enabling Tag Switching On The Atm Interface
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching Internet address is 1.0.1.11/24 MTU 1500 bytes, BW 8000000 Kbit, DLY 5000 usec, rely 255/255, load 1/255 Encapsulation LOOPBACK, loopback not set, keepalive set (10 sec) Last input 00:00:03, output never, output hang never Last clearing of "show interface"...
Page 471: Displaying The Atm Interface Configuration
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching Switch(config)# interface atm 0/0/3 Switch(config-if)# ip address 1.3.11.3 255.255.0.0 Switch(config-if)# tag-switching ip Switch(config-if)# exit Displaying the ATM Interface Configuration To display the ATM interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show tag-switching interfaces...
Page 472: Displaying The Ospf Configuration
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching An IP address of 1.1.1.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 is entered as an IP network prefix of Note 1.1.1.0 with a subnet mask of 0.0.0.255. Likewise, an IP address of 1.2.1.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 is entered as an IP network prefix of 1.2.1.0 with a subnet mask of 0.0.0.255.
Page 473: Displaying The Tag Switching Vpi Range
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching To change the default tag VPI range, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Enters interface configuration mode on the specified ATM interface.
Page 474: Configuring Tdp Control Channels (Optional)
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching IP tagging enabled TSP Tunnel tagging not enabled Tagging operational MTU = 4470 ATM tagging: Tag VPI range = 5 - 6, Control VC = 6/32 <information deleted> Configuring TDP Control Channels (Optional) Although not necessary for most configurations, you can change the default Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP) control channel VPI and virtual channel identifier (VCI) if you want to use a nondefault value.
Page 475: Displaying The Tdp Control Channels
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching Switch(config-if)# ip address 1.2.0.12 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# tag-switching ip Switch(config-if)# tag-switching atm control-vc 6 32 Switch(config-if)# exit If you are having trouble establishing a TDP session, verify that the VPI and VCI values match on the TDP control channels of the source switch and destination switch.
Page 476 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching Command Purpose Step 5 Switch(config-subif)# ip unnumbered type Enables IP unnumbered on the ATM interface and number assigns the unnumbered interface to an interface that has an IP address. We recommend enabling IP unnumbered because it allows you to conserve IP addresses and reduces the number of TVCs terminating on the switch.
Page 477: Connecting The Vp Tunnels
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching To connect the source and destination switch VP tunnels, proceed to the next section, “Connecting the Tunnels.” Displaying the VP Tunnel Configuration To display the VP tunnel configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm vp...
Page 478: Configuring Vc Merge
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching Displaying the VP Tunnel Configuration The following example shows PVP 51 on ATM interface 0/1/1 connected to PVP 101 on ATM interface 0/1/3: Switch# show atm vp Interface Type X-Interface X-VPI Status ATM0/1/1...
Page 479: Configuring Tag Switching Cos
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching CoS Configuring Tag Switching CoS Quality of service (QoS) allows ATM to meet the transmission quality and service availability of many different types of data. The need for delay-sensitive data, such as voice, can be given a higher priority than data that is not delay-sensitive, such as e-mail.
Page 480: Configuring The Service Class And Relative Weight
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching CoS Table 16-2 ATM Forum Class Mapping for Physical Ports ATM Forum Service Category Service Class Relative Weight 1. Even though the CBR service category is mapped to service class 2, all of the CBR VCs are rate scheduled only, and therefore they are not WRR scheduled.
Page 481: Displaying The Tvc Configuration
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching CoS Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm Specifies an ATM interface and enters interface card/subcard/port[.vpt#] configuration mode. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# Enters the service class and relative weight for a atm service-class weight physical interface.
Page 482 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Tag Switching CoS Rx connection-traffic-table-index: 63998 Rx service-category: WRR_1 (WRR Bit Rate) Rx pcr-clp01: none Rx scr-clp01: none Rx mcr-clp01: none cdvt: 1616833580 (from default for interface) mbs: none Tx connection-traffic-table-index: 63998 Tx service-category: WRR_1 (WRR Bit Rate) Tx pcr-clp01: none Tx scr-clp01: none...
Page 483: Threshold Group For Tbr Classes
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Threshold Group for TBR Classes Threshold Group for TBR Classes A threshold group utilizes the memory efficiently among VCs of a particular traffic type. Each threshold group is programmed with a dynamic memory allocation profile that maps into the needs of the connections of a particular service class.
Page 484: Rm Cac Support
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS CTT Row Table 16-7 gives the eight thresholds for threshold groups 6, 7, 8, and 9. Table 16-7 Region Thresholds for Threshold Groups Lower Upper Queue Marking Discard Region Limit Limit Limit Threshold Threshold 8191 8128...
Page 485: Tag Switching Configuration Example
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Tag Switching Configuration Example Tag Switching Configuration Example Figure 16-4 shows an example tag switching network. Figure 16-4 Example Network for Tag Switching R5-2 R5-3 e0/1 e0/1 e0/2 e0/2 e0/5 e0/2 R5-1 R5-5 e0/3 e0/4 a2/0...
Page 486 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Tag Switching Configuration Example Router 5-3 Configuration The configuration of router R5-3, interface e0/2, follows: router_R5-3# configure terminal router_R5-3(config)# ip cef switch router_R5-3(config)# tag-switching advertise-tags router_R5-3(config)# interface e0/2 router_R5-3(config-if)# tag-switching ip router_R5-3(config-if)# exit The configuration of router R5-3, interface e0/5 follows: router_R5-3(config)# interface e0/5 router_R5-3(config-if)# tag-switching ip...
Page 487: Mpls Overview
MPLS Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), as standardized by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and as enabled by Cisco IOS software, allows the construction of highly scalable and flexible IP Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) that support multiple levels of services. MPLS offers the following benefits: IP over ATM scalability—Enables service providers to keep up with Internet growth...
Page 488: Hardware And Software Restrictions
Guide _confg/8500tags.htm ATM and Layer 3 “Troubleshooting Tag and See PDF Version for EFT Troubleshooting Guide MPLS Switching documentation Connections” Cisco IOS Switching Services “Multi protocol Label http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/d Configuration Guide, Release Switching Overview” oc/product/software/ios121/121cgcr/s 12.1 witch_c/xcprt4/xcdtagov.htm#xtocid48 Cisco IOS Switching Services “Configuring Multiprotocol...
Page 489: Mpls/Tag Switching Terminology
From an historical and functional standpoint, Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) is a superset of the pre-standard Cisco Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP), which also supports MPLS forwarding along normally routed paths. For those features that LDP and TDP share in common, the pattern of protocol...
Page 490: How Mpls Works
The differences between LDP and TDP for those features supported by both protocols are largely embedded in their respective implementation details. For more information on MPLS/tag switching terminology, refer to the Cisco IOS Switching Services Configuration Guide, Release 12.1.
Page 491: Distribution Of Label Bindings
Platform-wide—An LDP platform supports a single platform-wide label space for use by interfaces • that can share the same labels. For Cisco platforms, all interface types except LC-ATM use the platform-wide label space. Summary Route Propagation Figure 16-5 shows the summary route propagation between four LSRs in an MPLS network.
Page 492: Lfib Table Look Up Process
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS Overview Figure 16-5 Summary Route Propagation Between LSRs Use label "65,180" for FEC 172.68/16 NetLSR2 AdminLSR1 a0/0 a0/0/0 a0/1/0 a1/0/0 AdminRt1 a1/1/0 Use label "85,220" for FEC 172.68/16 SalesLSR4 a2/0/0 SalesRt1 172.68.10/24 a3/0/0 e3/1/0 a2/1/0...
Page 493: Mpls Network Packet Transmission
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS Network Packet Transmission Figure 16-6 ATM MPLS LFIB Table Update NetLSR2 AdminLSR1 a0/1/0 a1/0/0 a0/0 a0/0/0 AdminRt1 a1/1/0 SalesLSR4 a2/0/0 SalesRt1 172.68.10/24 a2/1/0 e3/1/0 a3/0/0 e1/0 e3/2/0 NetLSR3 SalesRt2 172.68.44/24 e2/0 = Packet = Packet with VPI/VCI label MPLS Network Packet Transmission This section provides a description of a packet being transmitted across an MLPS enabled network and...
Page 494: Configuring Label Edge Routing
Configuring Label Edge Routing This section describes label edge router (LER) for the Cisco Catalyst 8540. With LER, the Cisco Catalyst 8540 can be installed at the edge of a packet- and cell-based network with both or either of them MPLS-enabled.
Page 495: Ler Software Limitations
Ethernet interfaces, refer to “Configuring Tag Switching” in the Layer 3 Switching Software and Feature Configuration Guide. LER Software Limitations The following restrictions apply to LER on the Cisco Catalyst 8540: The ATM interface (only main interface) can be linked with only the enhanced ATM router module •...
Page 496: Mpls Processing
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS Configuring Label Edge Routing MPLS Processing To configure LER with the enhanced ATM router module acting as MPLS edge proxy, perform the following steps: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# mpls ip...
Page 497: Tag Switching Processing
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS Over Fast Ethernet Interfaces Tag Switching Processing To configure LER with the enhanced ATM router module acting as a tag edge proxy, perform the following steps: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects the interface to be configured.
Page 498: Configuring Mpls On Fast Ethernet Interfaces
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS Over Fast Ethernet Interfaces forwards all MPLS packets it receives to the enhanced ATM router module. It also forwards all IP packets to the enhanced ATM router module if a VRF is configured on the Fast Ethernet or if the outgoing interface is MPLS-enabled.
Page 499: Mpls Vpns
IP packets to any other site in the same VPN. Each VPN is associated with one or more VPN routing or forwarding instances (VRFs). A VRF consists of an IP routing table, a derived Cisco express forwarding (CEF) table, and a set of interfaces that use this forwarding table.
Page 500: Configuring Vpn On Fast Ethernet Interface
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs processor on behalf of the interfaces. The VPN interfaces forward all IP packets they receive from the CE device to the enhanced ATM router module. The enhanced ATM router module processes the packets and forwards them to the appropriate outgoing port.
Page 501: Network Configuration Example
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs The enhanced ATM router module provides efficient MPLS processing for four Fast Ethernet interfaces. Note Network Configuration Example Figure 16-8 is an example of an MPLS VPN using ATM switch routers. Figure 16-8 MPLS VPN Example Network 8540-ATM-PE1 lo0 - 22.0.0.1...
Page 502 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs router bgp 104 bgp log-neighbor-changes redistribute connected neighbor 12.0.0.2 remote-as 100 8540-ATM-PE1 Configuration The configuration of ATM switch router 8540-ATM-PE1, follows: ip vrf vpn1 rd 200:1 route-target export 200:1 route-target import 100:1 interface Loopback0 ip address 22.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 interface FastEthernet0/0/0...
Page 503 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs 8540-ATM-P Configuration The configuration of ATM switch router 8540-ATM-P, follows: interface Loopback0 ip address 23.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 interface ATM12/0/0 ip unnumbered Loopback0 logging event subif-link-status no atm ilmi-keepalive tag-switching ip mpls-forwarding interface ATM2/0/0 interface ATM12/0/2 ip unnumbered Loopback0 logging event subif-link-status...
Page 504 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs router ospf 100 log-adjacency-changes network 24.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 100 router bgp 100 bgp log-neighbor-changes neighbor 22.0.0.1 remote-as 100 neighbor 22.0.0.1 update-source Loopback0 address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1 redistribute connected neighbor 7.0.0.2 remote-as 105 neighbor 7.0.0.2 activate no auto-summary no synchronization...
Page 505: Configuring Mpls Vpn Using Atm Rfc 1483 Interfaces
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs Configuring MPLS VPN Using ATM RFC 1483 Interfaces Defined in RFC 1483, multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM, provides a mechanisms for carrying traffic other than just IP traffic. RFC 1483 specifies two ways to do this: Logical Link Control (LLC)/Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) encapsulation—in this method, •...
Page 506: Network Configuration Example
Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs The following example shows how to configure the RFC1483 MPLS VPN interface connected to the customer equipment from the PE ATM switch router and cross connected to the enhanced ATM router module interface: 8540-ATM-PE1# configure terminal 8540-ATM-PE1(conf)# interface ATM11/0/2...
Page 507 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs For this example LDP and IP CEF are running. Note 75k-CE1 Configuration The configuration of router 75k-CE1, follows: interface ATM0/0.2 point-to-point ip address 12.0.0.1 255.255.0.0 atm pvc 30 3 300 aal5snap router bgp 104 bgp log-neighbor-changes redistribute connected...
Page 508 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs router bgp 100 bgp log-neighbor-changes neighbor 24.0.0.1 remote-as 100 neighbor 24.0.0.1 update-source Loopback0 address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1 redistribute connected neighbor 12.0.0.1 remote-as 104 neighbor 12.0.0.1 activate no auto-summary no synchronization exit-address-family address-family vpnv4 neighbor 24.0.0.1 activate neighbor 24.0.0.1 send-community extended...
Page 509 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs interface Loopback0 ip address 24.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 interface ATM2/0/0.1 point-to-point ip vrf forwarding vpn1 ip address 7.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 interface ATM12/0/1 no ip address atm pvc 2 100 pd on interface ATM2/0/0.1 2 200 encap aal5snap logging event subif-link-status clock source free-running no atm ilmi-keepalive...
Page 510 Chapter 16 Configuring Tag Switching and MPLS MPLS VPNs router bgp 105 bgp log-neighbor-changes redistribute connected neighbor 7.0.0.1 remote-as 100 ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 16-44 OL-7396-01...
Page 511 C H A P T E R Configuring Signalling Features This chapter describes signalling-related features and their configuration for the ATM switch router. This chapter provides advanced configuration instructions for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Note Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers. For general information about ATM signalling protocols, refer to the Guide to ATM Technology.
Page 512: Configuring Signalling Ie Forwarding
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Signalling IE Forwarding Configuring Signalling IE Forwarding You enable signalling information element (IE) forwarding of the specified IE from the calling party to the called party. The default is to transfer all the information elements in the signalling message. Note To configure interface signalling IE transfer, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode:...
Page 513: C H A P T E R 17 Configuring Signalling Features
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring ATM SVC Frame Discard Example The following example displays the modified configuration of the signalling IE forwarding: Switch# more system:running-config Building configuration... Current configuration: version XX.X no service pad service udp-small-servers service tcp-small-servers hostname Switch <information deleted>...
Page 514: Displaying The Atm Frame Discard Configuration
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses When you configure atm svc-frame-discard-on-aal5ie, frame discard is installed if the AAL5 • information element is present. When you configure no atm svc-frame-discard-on-aal5ie, frame discard is installed on UNI 4 or • PNNI interfaces if explicitly requested by the SETUP and CONNECT messages.
Page 515: E.164 Conversion Methods
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses The following sections describe configuring E.164 support: E.164 Conversion Methods, page 17-5 • Configuring E.164 Gateway, page 17-5 • Configuring E.164 Address Autoconversion, page 17-8 • Configuring E.164 Address One-to-One Translation Table, page 17-9 •...
Page 516: Configuring An E.164 Address Static Route
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses Configuring an E.164 Address Static Route To configure an E.164 address static route, use the following command in global configuration mode: Command Purpose atm route address-prefix atm card/subcard/port At the configure prompt, configures the static [e164-address address-string [number-type route prefix with the E.164 address.
Page 517: Displaying The E.164 Address Association To Interface Configuration
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses To configure an E.164 address on a per-interface basis, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Selects an interface port. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# atm e164 address Associates the E.164 address to the interface.
Page 518: Configuring E.164 Address Autoconversion
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses Configuring E.164 Address Autoconversion If your network uses E164_ZDSP or E164_AESA addresses, you can configure E.164 address autoconversion. The E164_ZDSP and E164_AESA addresses include an embedded E.164 number in the E.164 portion of an E.164 ATM address. This embedded E.164 number is used in the autoconversion process.
Page 519: Displaying The E.164 Address Autoconversion
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses Displaying the E.164 Address Autoconversion To display the E.164 configuration on an interface, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm interface atm card/subcard/port Shows the E.164 address configuration on a per-port basis.
Page 520: Displaying The Atm E.164 Translation Table Configuration
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring E.164 Addresses Configuring one-to-one E.164 translation tables requires the following steps: Configure specific ATM interface(s) to connect to E.164 public networks to use the translation table. Step 1 Step 2 Configure the translation table. Add entries to the translation table for both the called and calling parties.
Page 521: Configuring Signalling Diagnostics Tables
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Signalling Diagnostics Tables Example The following example shows how to display the E.164 translation table configuration: Switch# more system:running-config Building configuration... Current configuration: version XX.X no service pad service udp-small-servers service tcp-small-servers hostname Switch atm e164 translation-table e164 address 1111111 nsap-address 11.111111111111111111111111.112233445566.11 e164 address 2222222 nsap-address 22.222222222222222222222222.112233445566.22...
Page 522 Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Signalling Diagnostics Tables 1 and 50, used to uniquely identify each set of filtering criteria you select. Each filtering criteria occupies one entry in the signalling diagnostics table. Each entry in the filter table is entered using command-line interface (CLI) commands or Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Page 523 Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Signalling Diagnostics Tables Command Purpose Step 15 Switch(config-atmsig-diag)# service-category Configures a filtering criteria based on the service {cbr | abr | vbr-rt | vbr-nrt | ubr | all} category of the rejected call. Step 16 Switch(config-atmsig-diag)# status [active Configures the status of the entry in the filter filter-criteria | inactive filter-criteria | delete...
Page 524: Displaying The Signalling Diagnostics Table Configuration
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Signalling Diagnostics Tables The following example shows how to configure the filter entry for filtering failed calls that came in through ATM interface 1/1/1: Switch(config)# atm signalling diagnostics 1 Switch(cfg-atmsig-diag)# incoming-port atm. 1/1/1 The following example shows how to configure the filter entry for filtering failed calls that went out through ATM interface 1/1/1: Switch(config)# atm signalling diagnostics 1 Switch(cfg-atmsig-diag)# outgoing-port atm 1/1/1...
Page 525: Configuring Closed User Group Signalling
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Closed User Group Signalling Switch# show atm signalling diagnostics record 1 D I S P L A Y I N D E X -------------------------------- Scope: internal, Cast Type: p2p, Conn Indicator: Setup Failure Connection Kind: switched-vc Service Category: UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate)
Page 526: Configuring Aliases For Cug Interlock Codes
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Closed User Group Signalling Configuring a CUG is described in the following sections: Configuring Aliases for CUG Interlock Codes, page 17-16 • Configuring CUG on an Interface, page 17-16 • Displaying the CUG, page 17-17 •...
Page 527: Displaying The Cug
CUG be denied. In ITU-T terminology, this is called outgoing-calls-barred (OCB) and incoming-calls-barred (ICB), respectively. Table 17-1 describes the relationship between the ITU-T CUG terminology and Cisco CUG terminology. Table 17-1 Cisco CUG and ITU-T CUG Terminology Conversion ITU-T CUG Terminology...
Page 528 Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Closed User Group Signalling Command Purpose show atm signalling cug Displays the CUG interface configuration [interface atm card/subcard/port] status. [access | alias alias-name | interlock-code interlock-code] more system:running-config Displays the CUG global configuration status. Examples The following example displays the global CUG configuration using the show atm signalling cug EXEC command:...
Page 529: Displaying The Signalling Statistics
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Configuring Closed User Group Signalling Displaying the Signalling Statistics To display the ATM signalling statistics, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show atm signalling statistics Displays the ATM signalling statistics. Example The following example displays the ATM signalling statistics: Switch# show atm signalling statistics Global Statistics: Calls Throttled: 0...
Page 530: Disabling Signalling On An Interface
Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Disabling Signalling on an Interface Disabling Signalling on an Interface If you disable signalling on a Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI) interface, PNNI routing is also disabled and Integrated Local Management Interface (ILMI) is automatically restarted whenever signalling is enabled or disabled.
Page 531 Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Multipoint-to-Point Funnel Signalling Examples Use the show atm status command to display the number of active funnels, point-to-point and point-to-multipoint setup messages. An example of the show atm status command output follows: Switch# show atm status NUMBER OF INSTALLED CONNECTIONS: (P2P=Point to Point, P2MP=Point to MultiPoint, MP2P=Multipoint to Point) Type...
Page 532 Chapter 17 Configuring Signalling Features Multipoint-to-Point Funnel Signalling ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 17-22 OL-7396-01...
Page 533: Configuring Interfaces
C H A P T E R Configuring Interfaces This chapter describes the steps required to configure the physical interfaces on the ATM switch router. Your switch is configured as specified in your order and is ready for installation and startup when it leaves the factory.
Page 534: Configuring 25-Mbps Interfaces (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring 25-Mbps Interfaces (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) For hardware installation and cabling instructions, refer to the ATM Port Adapter and Interface Module Note Installation Guide. For complete descriptions of the commands mentioned in this chapter, refer to the ATM Switch Router Command Reference publication.
Page 535: Chapter 18 Configuring Interface
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring 155-Mbps SM, MM, and UTP Interfaces For the 12-port 25-Mbps port adapter, the following parameters can be configured on physical ports 0 or 6. Parameters configured on port 0 apply to ports 0 to 5, and parameters configured on port 6 apply to ports 6 to 11.
Page 536: Default 155-Mbps Atm Interface Configuration Without Autoconfiguration
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring 155-Mbps SM, MM, and UTP Interfaces The 155-Mbps port adapter supports mixed mode. Port 0 is a single-mode interface and ports 1 Note through 3 are multimode interfaces. The port adapter supports SC-type and unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) connectors, while receive and transmit LEDs on each port give quick, visual indications of port status and operation.
Page 537: Configuring Oc-3C Mmf Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring OC-3c MMF Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Command Purpose Step 6 Switch(config-if)# clock source {free-running | Modifies the clock source. loop-timed | network-derived} Step 7 Switch(config-if)# scrambling {cell-payload | Modifies the scrambling mode. sts-stream} Example The following example configures ATM interface 3/1/1 as the network side of a private UNI running version 3.1.
Page 538: Manual Oc-3C Mmf Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring 622-Mbps SM and MM Interfaces Synchronous Transfer Signal (STS) stream scrambling = on • Cell payload scrambling = on • Manual OC-3c MMF Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To manually change any of the default configuration values, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 539: Default 622-Mbps Atm Interface Configuration Without Autoconfiguration
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring 622-Mbps SM and MM Interfaces Default 622-Mbps ATM Interface Configuration without Autoconfiguration If ILMI has been disabled or if the connecting end node does not support ILMI, the following defaults are assigned to all 622-Mbps interfaces: ATM interface type = UNI •...
Page 540: Manual 622-Mbps Interface Configuration
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring 622-Mbps SM and MM Interfaces Manual 622-Mbps Interface Configuration To manually change any of the default configuration values, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Specifies the ATM interface and enters interface configuration mode.
Page 541: Configuring Oc-12C Sm And Mm Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring OC-12c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Configuring OC-12c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) The 4-port OC-12c SM and MM interface modules provide either single-mode or multimode intermediate reach. The OC-12c interface module provides an interface to ATM switching fabrics for transmitting and receiving data bidirectionally at up to 622 Mbps.
Page 542: Manual Oc-12C Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring OC-12c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Manual OC-12c Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To manually change any of the default configuration values, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Specifies the ATM interface and enters interface...
Page 543: Configuring Oc-48C Sm And Mm Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring OC-48c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Configuring OC-48c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) The Catalyst 8540 MSR supports the following three OC-48c SM and MM intermediate reach fiber interface modules: 1-port OC-48c single-mode intermediate reach plus 4-port OC-12 single-mode fiber •...
Page 544: Manual Oc-48C Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring OC-48c SM and MM Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Manual OC-48c Interface Configuration (Catalyst 8540 MSR) To manually change any of the default configuration values, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/port Specifies the ATM interface and enters interface...
Page 545: Configuring Ds3 And E3 Interfaces
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring DS3 and E3 Interfaces Configuring DS3 and E3 Interfaces The 45-Mbps DS3 and the 34-Mbps E3 port adapters are used for wide-area connections, to link multiple campuses, or to connect to public networks. DS3 and E3 Interface Configuration You can configure your switch router with only the number and type of interfaces required, with up to 64 DS3 or E3 interface ports on the Catalyst 8540 MSR and up to 32 DS3 or E3 interface ports on the Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010 ATM switch router.
Page 546: Manual Ds3 And E3 Interface Configuration
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring DS3 and E3 Interfaces Auto-ferf on LOS = on • Auto-ferf on OOF = on • Auto-ferf on LCD = on (applicable to nonplcp mode only) • Auto-ferf on AIS = on • Manual DS3 and E3 Interface Configuration To manually change any of the default configuration values, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command...
Page 547: Configuring T1/E1 Trunk Interfaces
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring T1/E1 Trunk Interfaces Configuring T1/E1 Trunk Interfaces The T1 and E1 trunk port adapters, used for intercampus or wide-area links, have four ports. T1/E1 Trunk Interface Configuration The ATM switch router supports any combination of port adapters. You can configure your switch router with only the number and type of interfaces required, with up to 64 T1 or E1 interface ports on the Catalyst 8540 MSR and up to 32 T1 or E1 interface ports on the Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 548: Manual T1 And E1 Interface Configuration
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Configuring T1/E1 Trunk Interfaces E1 port adapter: Framing = g.832 adm • Line coding = HDB3 • Cell payload scrambling = off • Clock source = network-derived • • Auto-ferf on LOS = on • Auto-ferf on OOF = on •...
Page 549: Troubleshooting The Interface Configuration
Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Troubleshooting the Interface Configuration Examples The following example shows how to change the default ATM interface type to private using the atm uni type private command: Switch# configure terminal Switch(config)# interface atm 0/0/0 Switch(config-if)# atm uni type private The following example shows how to change the clock source using the clock source network-derived command: Switch# configure terminal...
Page 550 Chapter 18 Configuring Interfaces Troubleshooting the Interface Configuration ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 18-18 OL-7396-01...
Page 551 C H A P T E R Configuring Circuit Emulation Services This chapter describes circuit emulation services (CES) and how to configure the CES T1/E1 port adapters in the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers. You can use CES T1/E1 port adapters for links that require constant bit rate (CBR) services.
Page 552: C H A P T E R 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services
T1/E1 CES unstructured services T1/E1 CES structured services • The Cisco IOS release 12.1(22)EB and later releases for the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, Note and LightStream 1010 ATM switch router support the ATM Forum CES IWF MIB and SNMP agent code.
Page 553: Framing Formats And Line Coding Options For Ces Modules
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Overview of CES T1/E1 Interfaces • atmfCESLostCells • atmfCESMisinsertedCellsz • atmfCESRetryLimit • atmfCESLocalAddr (not writeable) Framing Formats and Line Coding Options for CES Modules The CES modules support the framing formats and line coding options shown in Table 19-1.
Page 554: Configuring Ces T1/E1 Interfaces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring CES T1/E1 Interfaces The following defaults are assigned to CES T1 port adapters: Framing = ESF • Line coding = B8ZS • The following defaults are assigned to CES E1 port adapters: Framing = E1_LT •...
Page 555 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring CES T1/E1 Interfaces Command Purpose Sets the ASCII name for the CES-IWF circuit. • The maximum length is 64 characters. The default is CBRx/x/x:0. • Enables the partial AAL1 cell fill service for structured service only.
Page 556 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring CES T1/E1 Interfaces Command Purpose Switch(config-if)# ces pvc circuit-id Configures the destination (active) port for the dest-address atm-address [[vpi vpi] vci vci] circuit and configures a soft PVC, as follows: [retry-interval [first retry-interval] Specifies the circuit identification.
Page 557: General Guidelines For Creating Soft Pvcs For Circuit Emulation Services
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services General Guidelines for Creating Soft PVCs for Circuit Emulation Services The following example shows how to change the default CBR interface framing mode to super frame, using the ces dsx1 framing command: Switch# configure terminal Switch(config)# interface cbr 3/0/0 Switch(config-if)# ces dsx1 framing sf The following example shows how to change the default CBR interface line build-out length to range...
Page 558 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services General Guidelines for Creating Soft PVCs for Circuit Emulation Services To configure soft PVCs for either unstructured or structured circuit emulation services, follow these steps: Determine which CES interfaces are currently configured in your ATM switch router chassis, using the Step 1 show ces status command in privileged EXEC mode.
Page 559: Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services Configure the source (active) end of the soft PVC last, using the information derived from Step 6. You Step 7 must configure the source end of the soft PVC last, because that end not only defines the configuration information for the source port, but also requires you to enter the CES-IWF ATM address and VPI/VCI values for the destination circuit.
Page 560: Configuring Network Clocking For Unstructured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Network Clocking for Unstructured CES Circuit emulation services require that the network clock be configured properly. Unstructured services can use synchronous, Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS), or adaptive clocking mode. For instructions on configuring network clocking, see Chapter 3, “Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router.”...
Page 561 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services To configure a hard PVC for unstructured CES, follow these steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch# show ces status Displays information about the current CBR interfaces.
Page 562 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services CESwitch# show atm status NUMBER OF INSTALLED CONNECTIONS: (P2P=Point to Point, P2MP=Point to MultiPoint, MP2P=Multipoint to Point) Type PVCs SoftPVCs SVCs TVCs PVPs SoftPVPs SVPs Total P2MP MP2P TOTAL INSTALLED CONNECTIONS = PER-INTERFACE STATUS SUMMARY AT 18:12:45 UTC Thu Jul 22 1999: Interface...
Page 563: Verifying A Hard Pvc For Unstructured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services Verifying a Hard PVC for Unstructured CES To verify the hard PVC configuration, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows configuration information for the hard PVC.
Page 564 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services The destination address of a soft PVC can point to either of the following: Any ATM switch router external ATM port in the network • A port in any other CES module in the network •...
Page 565: Phase 1—Configuring The Destination (Passive) Side Of The Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services Phase 1—Configuring the Destination (Passive) Side of the Soft PVC To configure the destination (passive) side of a soft PVC destination port, follow these steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 566: Phase 2—Configuring The Source (Active) Side Of The Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services CESwitch(config-if)# ces dsx1 clock source network-derived CESwitch(config-if)# ces circuit 0 circuit-name CBR-PVC-B CESwitch(config-if)# no shutdown Note If you do not specify the circuit name and logical name parameters in the command line, the system automatically assigns a unique default name in the form CBRx/y/z:# for the circuit being configured.
Page 567: Verifying A Soft Pvc For Unstructured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Unstructured Circuit Emulation Services Example The following example shows how to configure the source (active) side of a soft PVC, as shown in Figure 19-2: CESwitch# show ces address CES-IWF ATM Address(es): 47.0091.8100.0000.0060.5c71.1f01.4000.0c80.1034.10 CBR-PVC-B CESwitch# configure terminal CESwitch(config)# interface cbr 3/0/0...
Page 568: Configuring T1/E1 Structured (N X 64) Circuit Emulation Services
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Dst: atm addr 47.0091.8100.0000.00e0.4fac.b401.4000.0c81.8030.00 The following example shows how to display the detailed circuit information for CBR 3/0/0, the source (active) side of the soft PVC (shown in Figure 19-2), using the show ces circuit interface cbr command:...
Page 569: Configuring Network Clocking For Structured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Network Clocking for Structured CES Circuit emulation services require that the network clock be configured properly. For structured services, synchronous clocking is required. For instructions on configuring network clocking, see Chapter 3, “Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router.”.
Page 570 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services To configure the CES port for structured CES, follow these steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch# show ces status Displays information about current CBR interfaces.
Page 571 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Name Status Status Status Reg State State State ------------- -------- ------------ -------- ------------ --------- -------- ATM0/0/1 DOWN down waiting Idle ATM0/0/5 DOWN shutdown waiting Idle ATM0/0/6 DOWN shutdown...
Page 572: Verifying A Hard Pvc For Structured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Verifying a Hard PVC for Structured CES To verify the hard PVC configured with structured services, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows the configuration information for the hard PVC.
Page 573: Configuring A Hard Pvc For Structured Ces With A Shaped Vp Tunnel
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Configuring a Hard PVC for Structured CES with a Shaped VP Tunnel A shaped VP tunnel is a VP tunnel that, by default, carries only VCs of the constant bit rate (CBR) service category with a peak cell rate (PCR).
Page 574 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Command Purpose Step 5 Switch(config-if)# atm pvp vpi [hierarchical | Configures a shaped VP tunnel, as follows: shaped] [rx-cttr index] [tx-cttr index] Specifies whether the tunnel is hierarchical •...
Page 575: Phase 2—Configuring A Hard Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Phase 2—Configuring a Hard PVC To configure a hard PVC, follow these steps: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch# show ces status Displays information about the current CBR interfaces.
Page 576 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Command Purpose Step 8 Switch(config-if)# ces pvc circuit-id interface Configures the destination port for the circuit and atm card/subcard/port vpi vpi vci vci configures a hard PVC, as follows: Specifies the circuit identification.
Page 577: Verifying A Hard Pvc For Structured Ces With A Shaped Vp Tunnel
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services ATM3/1/0 DOWN down waiting Idle ATM3/1/1 done UpAndNormal Active 2way_in ATM3/1/1.99 done UpAndNormal Active 2way_in ATM3/1/2 DOWN down waiting Idle ATM3/1/3 DOWN down waiting Idle ATM-P4/0/0 waiting Idle...
Page 578: Configuring A Soft Pvc For Structured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Configured CDV 2000 usecs, Measured CDV unavailable De-jitter: UnderFlow unavailable, OverFlow unavailable ErrTolerance 8, idleCircuitdetect OFF, onHookIdleCode 0x0 state: VcLoc, maxQueueDepth 81, startDequeueDepth Partial Fill: 47, Structured Data Transfer 1 HardPVC src: CBR3/1/0 vpi 0, vci 16...
Page 579 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services To obtain the destination address for an already configured port in a CES module, log into the remote ATM switch router containing that module. Then use the show ces address command to display all the CES-IWF ATM addresses currently configured for that node.
Page 580: Phase 1—Configuring The Destination (Passive) Side Of A Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Phase 1—Configuring the Destination (Passive) Side of a Soft PVC To configure a destination (passive) side of a soft PVC for structured CES, follow these steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose...
Page 581: Phase 2—Configuring The Source (Active) Side Of A Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Command Purpose Step 11 Switch(config-if)# ces pvc circuit-id passive Configures the destination (passive) port circuit follow-ifstate status to follow the status of the physical interface. The default circuit setting ignores the status of the physical interface.
Page 582 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Command Purpose Step 5 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit circuit-id timeslots Configures the following CES connection number attributes for the circuit: Circuit id number. • For CES T1 structured service, –...
Page 583: Verifying A Soft Pvc For Structured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Verifying a Soft PVC for Structured CES To verify the soft PVC configured with structured CES, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows the configuration information for the soft PVC.
Page 584: Configuring A Soft Pvc For Structured Ces With Cas Enabled
Configuring a Soft PVC for Structured CES, page 19-28. The optional CAS feature is enabled, but without the optional, Cisco-proprietary on-hook detection • feature enabled. This option is described in the following procedure. Both the optional CAS and on-hook detection features are enabled. For information about •...
Page 585 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Figure 19-6 Soft PVC Configured for Structured CES with CAS Enabled Target switch CES port adapter Circuit 1 CBR-PVC-B CBR-PVC-A (CBR3/0/3) (CBR3/0/0) (VPI 0, VCI 1040) (VPI 0, VCI 16) Destination (passive) side of PVC Source (active) side of PVC...
Page 586: Verifying A Soft Pvc For Structured Ces With Cas Enabled
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Example The following example shows how to enable channel-associated signalling (CAS) on a soft PVC (see Figure 19-6): CESwitch# show ces status Interface Admin Port Channels in Name Status...
Page 587: Configuring A Soft Pvc For Structured Ces With Cas And On-Hook Detection Enabled
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services cas ON, cell_header 0x100 (vci = 16) Configured CDV 2000 usecs, Measured CDV unavailable De-jitter: UnderFlow unavailable, OverFlow unavailable ErrTolerance 8, idleCircuitdetect OFF, onHookIdleCode 0x0 state: VcActive, maxQueueDepth 45, startDequeueDepth Partial Fill:...
Page 588: Verifying A Soft Pvc For Structured Ces With Cas And On-Hook Detection Enabled
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services CESwitch(config-if)# shutdown CESwitch(config-if)# ces circuit 1 cas on-hook-detect 2 CESwitch(config-if)# no shutdown The four ABCD bits in the CAS mechanism are device-specific, depending on the manufacturer of the Note voice/video telephony device that generates the CBR traffic.
Page 589 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Assume that certain configuration information has already been established for a soft PVC (see Figure 19-6) and that you are to create an additional soft PVC involving the same CES module. The following assumptions apply to creating multiple soft PVCs on the same T1/E1 port (see Figure 19-7):...
Page 590: Phase 1—Configuring The Destination (Passive) Side Of Multiple Soft Pvcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Phase 1—Configuring the Destination (Passive) Side of Multiple Soft PVCs To configure multiple soft PVCs on the destination (passive) side of the same port, follow these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 591: Phase 2—Configuring The Source (Active) Side Of Multiple Soft Pvcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Example The following example shows how to configure multiple soft PVCs on the destination (passive) side of the same port (shown in Figure 19-7): CESwitch(config)# interface cbr 3/0/2 CESwitch(config-if)# shutdown CESwitch(config-if)# ces aal1 service structured CESwitch(config-if)# ces dsx1 clock source network-derived...
Page 592: Verifying The Creation Of Multiple Structured Soft Pvcs On The Same Ces Port
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Command Purpose Step 6 Switch# show ces address Shows the CES address for the destination end of the circuit. Use this command to retrieve the VPI/VCI of the destination port.
Page 593 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 Structured (n x 64) Circuit Emulation Services Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows the configuration information for the soft PVC. show ces address Shows the CES address for the destination end of the circuit. show ces circuit interface cbr Shows the detailed interface configuration card/subcard/port circuit-id...
Page 594: Configuring T1/E1 Ces Svcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Channels used by this circuit: 24 Cell-Rate: 172, Bit-Rate 64000 cas OFF, cell_header 0x8200 (vci = 2080) Configured CDV 2000 usecs, Measured CDV unavailable De-jitter: UnderFlow unavailable, OverFlow unavailable ErrTolerance 8, idleCircuitdetect OFF, onHookIdleCode 0x0 state: VcActive, maxQueueDepth 81, startDequeueDepth Partial Fill:...
Page 595: Phase 1—Configuring The Destination (Passive) Side Of The Unstructured Switched Vc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Phase 1—Configuring the Destination (Passive) Side of the Unstructured Switched VC To configure the destination (passive) side of an unstructured switched VC destination port, follow these steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 596: Phase 2—Configuring The Source (Active) Side Of The Unstructured Switched Vc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs CESwitch(config-if)# ces dsx1 clock source network-derived CESwitch(config-if)# ces circuit 0 circuit-name CBR-SVC-B CESwitch(config-if)# no shutdown Note If you do not specify the circuit name and logical name parameters in the command line, the system automatically assigns a unique default name in the form CBRx/y/z:# for the circuit being configured.
Page 597: Verifying A Switched Vc For Unstructured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Example The following example shows how to configure the switched VC for unstructured CES (shown in Figure 19-8): Use the show ces status command to confirm CES interface CBR 0/0/0 is up. Step 1 Switch# show ces status Interface...
Page 598: Configuring T1/E1 Structured Ces Svcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows configuration information for the switched VC. show ces circuit interface cbr card/subcard/port Shows detailed interface configuration circuit-id information for the switched VC. Examples The following example shows how to display the basic information about the switched VC shown in Figure 19-8, using the show ces circuit command: Switch# show ces circuit...
Page 599: Phase 1—Configuring The Destination (Passive) Side Of The Structured Switched Vc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Figure 19-9 Switched VC Configured for Structured CES Target switch CES port adapter (module slot 1) Circuit 1 CBR-SVC-A CBR-SVC-B (CBR0/0/0) (CBR0/0/1) (VPI 0, VCI 16) (VPI 0, VCI 1040) Source (active) side of PVC Destination (passive) side of PVC DSO 1-3, and 7...
Page 600 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Command Purpose Step 8 Switch(config-if)# ces dsx1 linecode {ami | b8zs} Configures the CES T1 line code type. The default is b8zs. Switch(config-if)# ces dsx1 linecode {ami | Configures the CES E1 line code type. The hdb3} default is hdb3.
Page 601: Phase 2—Configuring The Source (Active) Side Of The Structured Switched Vc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Phase 2—Configuring the Source (Active) Side of the Structured Switched VC The example connection shown in Figure 19-9 is used in the following example configuration. To configure a switched VC for structured CES, follow these steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 602 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Example The following example shows how to configure the switched VC for structured CES (shown in Figure 19-9): Use the show ces status command to confirm CES interface CBR 0/0/0 is up. Step 1 Switch# show ces status Interface...
Page 603: Verifying A Switched Vc For Structured Ces
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring T1/E1 CES SVCs Verifying a Switched VC for Structured CES To verify the switched VC configuration, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows configuration information for the switched VC. show ces circuit interface cbr card/subcard/port Shows detailed interface configuration circuit-id...
Page 604: Reconfiguring A Previously Established Circuit
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Reconfiguring a Previously Established Circuit Reconfiguring a Previously Established Circuit Once you have configured a circuit, you cannot change the circuit’s configuration while the circuit is up. You must first bring the interface down. Then you can change the circuit configuration. After entering these configuration changes, you must bring the interface back up.
Page 605: Deleting A Previously Established Circuit
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Deleting a Previously Established Circuit Cell-Rate: 4107, Bit-Rate 1544000 cas OFF, cell_header 0x100 (vci = 16) cdv 2000 usecs, Measured cdv 350 usecs ErrTolerance 8, idleCircuitdetect OFF, onHookIdleCode 0x0 state: VcAlarm, maxQueueDepth 879, startDequeueDepth Partial Fill: 47, Structured Data Transfer 0 HardPVC...
Page 606: Verifying Deletion Of A Previously Established Circuit
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring SGCP CESwitch(config-if)# no ces circuit 0 Verifying Deletion of a Previously Established Circuit To verify the deletion of a previously configured circuit, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ces circuit Shows the configuration information for the circuit.
Page 607: Configuring Sgcp On The Entire Switch
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring SGCP The CES circuit is not configured as part of a hard PVC. • The following sections describe SGCP configuration tasks: Configuring SGCP on the Entire Switch, page 19-57 • Displaying SGCP, page 19-57 •...
Page 608: Configuring Ces Circuits For Sgcp
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring SGCP Configuring CES Circuits for SGCP Any single time slot (64 Kbps) allocated to a circuit on a CES T1/E1 interface can be configured for SGCP with these restrictions: CES is not the active source end of a soft PVC. •...
Page 609: Displaying Sgcp Endpoints
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring SGCP Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 14 timeslot 14 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 15 timeslot 15 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 16 timeslot 16 Switch(config-if)# ces pvc 16 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0060.3e64.fd01.4000.0c80.1038.10 vpi 0 vci 2064 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 17 timeslot 17 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 18 timeslot 18 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 19 timeslot 19 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 20 timeslot 20...
Page 610: Displaying Sgcp Connections
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring SGCP CBR1.1.0/24 active b234abc Displaying SGCP Connections To display SGCP connections (either globally or per single interface), use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show sgcp connection [interface cbr Displays the SGCP connections. card/subcard/port] Example The following example displays all SGCP connections created on the ATM switch router:...
Page 611: Shutting Down Sgcp
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Explicit Paths on CES VCs To send a DeleteConnection request for a connection that exists, the ATM switch router specifies • the destination address of the UDP packet as the source UDP address in the CreateConnection request.
Page 612: Configuring Ces Vc Explicit Paths
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Explicit Paths on CES VCs Configuring CES VC Explicit Paths To configure CES VC explicit paths, follow these steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface cbr card/subcard/port Selects the physical interface to configure. Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit circuit-id [cas]...
Page 613: Displaying Ces Vc Explicit Path Configuration
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Example The following example shows how to set a CES switched VC with an explicit path on CBR interface 3/1/0. Switch(config)# interface cbr3/1/0 Switch(config-if)# ces circuit 6 timeslots 6 Switch(config-if)# ces svc 6 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0010.073c.0101.4000.0c81.903c.60 explicit-path 1 identifier 1 only-explicit...
Page 614: Guidelines For Creating Point-To-Multipoint Ces Soft Pvcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Route optimization is not supported for point-to-multipoint soft PVCs. Note Guidelines for Creating Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVCs Perform the following steps to configure point-to-multipoint CES soft PVCs: Step 1 Determine whether you want to configure unstructured or structured point-to-multipoint CES soft PVCs.
Page 615: Configuring Point-To-Multipoint Unstructured Ces Soft Pvcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Unstructured CES Soft PVCs Figure 19-10 gives an example of point-to-multipoint unstructured CES soft PVC connections. Figure 19-10 Point-to-Multipoint Unstructured CES Soft PVC Connection Example Address = 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.6bb4.c501.4000.0c80.9030.10 VPI = 0, VCI = 16 CBR 1/1/0 CES PVC 0 Leaf =30...
Page 616 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Command Purpose Step 5 Dest_One(config-if)# ces aal1 service Configures the service type. The default is unstructured unstructured. Step 6 Dest_One(config-if)# ces aal1 clock {adaptive | Configures CES interface AAL1 clock mode. srts | synchronous} Step 7 Dest_One(config-if)# ces dsx1 clock source...
Page 617: Configuring The Source Side Of A Point-To-Multipoint Unstructured Ces Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Reenable the destination CES interface. Step 7 Dest_One(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# Next, configure the source side of the point-to-multipoint unstructured CES connection. Configuring the Source Side of a Point-to-Multipoint Unstructured CES Soft PVC To configure the source side of a point-to-multipoint unstructured CES soft PVC connection, perform the following steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command...
Page 618 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections For switch Dest_Two: Dest_Two# show ces address CES-IWF ATM Address(es): 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.6bb4.c502.4000.0c80.9030.10 CBR1/1/2:0 vpi 0 vci 2064 Dest_Two# Step 2 At the source switch for the point-to-multipoint CES connection, change to interface configuration mode for CBR interface 4/0/0.
Page 619: Configuring Point-To-Multipoint Structured Ces Soft Pvcs
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Configuring Point-to-Multipoint Structured CES Soft PVCs Figure 19-11 gives an example of point-to-multipoint structured CES soft PVC connections. Figure 19-11 Point-to-Multipoint Structured CES Soft PVC Connection Example Address = 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.6bb4.c501.4000.0c80.9030.10 VPI = 0, VCI = 16 CBR 1/1/0 CES PVC 1 Leaf =30...
Page 620 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Command Purpose Step 5 Dest_One(config-if)# ces aal1 service structured Configures the service type. The default is unstructured. Step 6 Dest_One(config-if)# ces aal1 clock {adaptive | Configures CES interface AAL1 clock mode. srts | synchronous} Step 7 Dest_One(config-if)# ces dsx1 clock source...
Page 621: Configuring The Source Side Of A Point-To-Multipoint Structured Ces Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Reenable the destination CES interface. Step 7 Dest_One(config-if)# no shutdown Dest_One(config-if)# Now you can configure the source side of the point-to-multipoint structured CES connection. Configuring the Source Side of a Point-to-Multipoint Structured CES Soft PVC To configure the source side of a point-to-multipoint structured CES soft PVC connection, perform the following steps, beginning in privileged EXEC mode: Command...
Page 622: Displaying Point-To-Multipoint Ces Soft Pvc Configuration
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections For switch Dest_Two: Dest_Two# show ces address CES-IWF ATM Address(es): 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.6bb4.c502.4000.0c80.9030.10 CBR1/1/2:1 vpi 0 vci 2064 Dest_Two# Step 2 At the source switch for the point-to-multipoint CES connection, change to interface configuration mode for CBR interface 4/0/0.
Page 623 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Examples The following example shows the point-to-multipoint CES soft PVC configuration of the source switch on interface CBR 4/0/0 using the show running-config command: Source# show running-config interface cbr 4/0/0 Building configuration...
Page 624: Deleting And Disabling Point-To-Multipoint Ces Soft Pvc Connections
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Deleting and Disabling Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections This section describes the process used to delete all or part of a CES point-to-multipoint soft PVC connection. This section also describes how to either enable or disable a point-to-multipoint CES soft PVC connection.
Page 625: Enabling And Disabling The Root Of A Point-To-Multipoint Ces Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Confirming VCC Deletion To confirm the deletion of the point-to-multipoint soft PVC from an interface, use the following EXEC command before and after deleting the point-to-multipoint soft PVC: Command Purpose show ces circuit interface cbr...
Page 626: Enabling And Disabling A Leaf Of A Point-To-Multipoint Ces Soft Pvc
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Switch(config-if)# ces pvc 0 p2mp Switch (ces-p2mp)# disable 04:47:14: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console 04:47:15: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface CBR4/0/0, changed state to down Switch (ces-p2mp)# The following example reenables the point-to-multipoint CES soft PVC connection: Switch (ces-p2mp)# enable Switch (ces-p2mp)# Enabling and Disabling a Leaf of a Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC...
Page 627 Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Command Purpose show running-config interface cbr Shows the configuration of the CBR card/subcard/port interfaces. show ces circuit interfaces cbr Shows the point-to-multipoint CES soft PVCs card/subcard/port circuit-id configured on the interface. Example The following example shows how to confirm that the party leaf of the CES point-to-multipoint soft PVC is disabled from the interface using the show running-config command:...
Page 628: Configuring The Retry Interval For Point-To-Multipoint Ces Soft-Pvc Parties
Chapter 19 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Configuring Point-to-Multipoint CES Soft PVC Connections Leaf Reference 101 Remote ATM address: 47.0091.8100.0000.0003.6bb4.c502.4000.0c80.9038.10 Remote VPI: 0 Remote VCI: 2064 Party Soft-Vc State Active The word “Inactive” appears after the Party Soft-Vc State field for leaf-reference 30 disable in the previous section.
Page 629 Module Installation Guide. For a more information on how to configure your Frame Relay specific network equipment, refer to the Cisco IOS 11.3 publications on the Documentation CD-ROM. This chapter includes the following sections: Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter, page 20-2 •...
Page 630: C H A P T E R 20 Configuring Frame Relay To Atm Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter The channelized DS3 (CDS3) Frame Relay port adapter provides one physical port (45 Mbps). Each DS3 interface consists of 28 T1 lines multiplexed through a single T3 trunk.
Page 631: Configuring The Cds3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Interface
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Clock source—internal • Line coding—b8zs • T1 yellow alarm—detection and generation • Configuring the CDS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Interface To manually change any of your default configuration values, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 632: Configuring The T1 Lines On The Cds3 Frame Relay Port Adapter
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Configuring the T1 Lines on the CDS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter To configure the T1 lines, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 633: Displaying The Cds3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Controller Information
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Displaying the CDS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Controller Information To display the controller configuration, use one of the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show controllers t3...
Page 634: Method Two
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized DS3 Frame Relay Port Adapter Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(config-if)# exit Exits serial interface configuration mode. Switch(config)# Step 4 Switch(config)# controller t3 card/subcard/port Selects the controller interface port and enters controller configuration mode.
Page 635: Configuring The Channelized E1 Frame Relay Port Adapter
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized E1 Frame Relay Port Adapter Configuring the Channelized E1 Frame Relay Port Adapter The channelized E1 (CE1) Frame Relay port adapter provides four physical ports. Each port supports up to 31 E1 serial interfaces, also referred to as channel groups, totalling 124 serial interfaces per port adapter.
Page 636: Configuring The Ce1 Frame Relay Port Adapter Interface
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the Channelized E1 Frame Relay Port Adapter Configuring the CE1 Frame Relay Port Adapter Interface If your CE1 Frame Relay port adapter needs to be configured, you must have the following information: Digital transmission link information, for example, E1 clock source and framing type •...
Page 637: Displaying The Ce1 Frame Relay Port Adapter Controller Information
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Functions Displaying the CE1 Frame Relay Port Adapter Controller Information To display your controller configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show controllers e1 card/subcard/port [brief Displays E1 controller configuration.
Page 638: Displaying Frame Relay Encapsulation
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Functions You must shut down the interface prior to Frame Relay encapsulation. Note Example Switch(config)# interface serial 0/1/0:5 Switch(config-if)# shutdown Switch(config-if)# encapsulation frame-relay ietf Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Displaying Frame Relay Encapsulation To display Frame Relay encapsulation, use the following user EXEC command:...
Page 639: Displaying Frame Relay Interface Configuration
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay Frame Size for Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Displaying Frame Relay Interface Configuration To display the Frame Relay interface configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose more system:running-config Displays the Frame Relay interface...
Page 640: Configuring And Using Frame Relay Frame Size
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay Frame Size for Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Usually the Frame Relay CTTR with the lowest frame size has the highest SCR for a given CIR. This is Note because of the overhead introduced by ATM [5 bytes/Cell + 8 Bytes for the AAL5 trailer + AAL5 Padding].
Page 641 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay Frame Size for Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Select which interface to configure. Step 2 Switch(config)# interface Serial1/0/1:1 Switch(config-if)# Configure the Frame Relay Soft VC and enable GAT. Step 3 Switch(config-if)# frame-relay soft-vc 128 dest-address 47.0091.8100.0000.0090.2156.d801.4000.0c80.1010.00 dlci 43 rx-cttr 102 tx-cttr 102 gat...
Page 642: Configuring Lmi
The keyword “gat” appears in the interface VC configuration confirming GAT is enabled. Configuring LMI Three industry-accepted standards are supported for addressing the Local Management Interface (LMI), including the Cisco specification. By default, the Cisco ILMI option is active on your Frame Relay interface. ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide...
Page 643: Configuring The Lmi Type
Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface serial Selects the interface to be configured. card/subcard/port:cgn Switch(config-if)# Step 2 Switch(config-if)# frame-relay lmi-type [cisco | Selects Frame Relay LMI type. ansi | q933a] Step 3 Switch(config-if)# end Exits interface configuration mode. Switch# Step 4 Switch# copy system:running-config Writes the LMI type to NVRAM.
Page 644: Configuring The Lmi Keepalive Interval
LMI enq recvd 5154, LMI stat sent 5154, LMI upd sent 0, DCE LMI up LMI DLCI 1023 LMI type is CISCO frame relay NNI Last input 00:00:04, output 00:00:20, output hang never <Information Deleted> Configuring the LMI Polling and Timer Intervals (Optional) You can set various optional counters, intervals, and thresholds to fine-tune the operation of your LMI on your Frame Relay devices.
Page 645: Displaying Frame Relay Serial Interface
MTU 4096 bytes, BW 1536 Kbit, DLY 0 usec, rely 229/255, load 14/255 Encapsulation FRAME-RELAY IETF, loopback not set, keepalive set (10 sec) LMI enq sent 0, LMI stat recvd 0, LMI upd recvd 0 LMI DLCI 1023 LMI type is CISCO frame relay DCE <information deleted> Displaying LMI Statistics...
Page 646: Configuring Frame Relay To Atm Resource Management
The following example displays the LMI statistics of a Frame Relay port adapter with an NNI interface: Switch> show frame-relay lmi interface serial 0/1/0:5 LMI Statistics for interface serial 0/1/0:5 (Frame Relay NNI) LMI Type = Cisco Invalid Unnumberred info 0Invalid Prot Disc 0...
Page 647 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Resource Management 1. In bits per second 2. In bits You can also use the following generic formula to calculate Frame Relay to ATM traffic conversion: PCR = Peak Cell Rate (cells/sec) •...
Page 648: Pvc Connection Traffic Rows
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Resource Management MBS = [Bc/8 ( 1/(1 –(CIR/PIR))) + 1 ] [OHB (n)] = [4000/8 (1/(1 -(32000/64000))+1] [2/64] = [500 ( 1 / 0.5 ) +1] [2/64] = [500 (2 +1)] [2/64] = [1500][2/64] = 46.875...
Page 649: Svc Connection Traffic Rows
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Resource Management SVC Connection Traffic Rows SVC connection traffic rows, or transient rows, are used by the signalling software to obtain traffic parameters for soft SVCs. Note SVC connection traffic rows cannot be deleted from the CLI or SNMP.
Page 650: Displaying The Frame Relay To Atm Connection Traffic Table
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Resource Management Example The following example shows how to configure a Frame Relay to ATM CTT row with non-real-time variable bit rate (VBR-NRT) service category, committed information rate of 64000 bits per second, a peak information rate of 1536000 bits per second, and a committed burst size of 8192 bits per second: Switch(config)# frame-relay connection-traffic-table-row 64000 8192 1536000 vbr-nrt Allocated index = 64000...
Page 651: Displaying Frame Relay Interface Resources
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Step 4 affects existing and future connections on the Frame Relay interface, but Steps 1, 2, 3 and 5 affect Note only future connections. Displaying Frame Relay Interface Resources To display your Frame Relay interface resource configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command...
Page 652: Characteristics And Types Of Virtual Connections
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Characteristics and Types of Virtual Connections The characteristics of the Frame Relay to ATM interworking VC, established when the VC is created, include the following: Frame Relay to ATM interworking parameters •...
Page 653: Configuration Guidelines
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Configuration Guidelines Perform the following tasks in a prescribed order before configuring a Frame Relay to ATM interworking permanent virtual channel (PVC): Configure the controller on the Frame Relay port adapter.
Page 654: Displaying Frame Relay To Atm Network Interworking Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections The serial interface is created with the channel-group command and configured using the encapsulation frame-relay ietf command. cgn is the channel group number of a channel group configured using the channel-group command. The dlci value appears in the Conn-Id and X-Conn-Id columns of the show vc command.
Page 655: Configuring Frame Relay To Atm Service Interworking Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Connection-type: PVC Cast-type: point-to-point Usage-Parameter-Control (UPC): tag-drop pvc-create-time : 00:00:10 Time-since-last-status-change : 00:00:03 Interworking Function Type : network de-bit Mapping : map-clp-or-de clp-bit Mapping : map-de ATM-P Interface: ATM-P0/1/0, Type: ATM-PSEUDO ATM-P VPI = 82...
Page 656 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections To configure a Frame Relay to ATM service interworking PVC, perform the following steps beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface serial Selects the interface to be configured.
Page 657: Displaying Frame Relay To Atm Service Interworking Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Displaying Frame Relay to ATM Service Interworking PVCs To display the service interworking PVC configuration, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show interfaces [serial card/subcard/port:cgn] Shows the serial interface configuration.
Page 658: Displaying Terminating Frame Relay To Atm Service Interworking Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections To configure terminating Frame Relay to ATM service interworking PVC connections, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface serial Selects the interface to be configured.
Page 659: Configuring Frame Relay Transit Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Configuring Frame Relay Transit PVCs This section describes configuring internal cross-connect Frame Relay to Frame Relay transit permanent virtual channels (PVCs). This type of PVC is used to establish a bidirectional facility to transfer Frame Relay traffic between two Frame Relay users.
Page 660: Configuring Frame Relay Soft Pvc Connections
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Configuring Frame Relay Soft PVC Connections This section describes configuring Frame Relay to ATM interworking soft permanent virtual channels (soft PVC) connections. You can configure the following soft PVC connections: Frame Relay to Frame Relay soft PVC connection, configured as network interworking •...
Page 661 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Figure 20-7 Frame Relay to Frame Relay Network Interworking Soft PVC Example s0/0/1:9 s0/1/0:5 DLCI = 255 DLCI = 43 Switch A Switch B User D User C...
Page 662 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Frame Relay to Frame Relay Interworking Soft PVC Configuration Example This section provides an example of a Frame Relay to Frame Relay network interworking soft PVC configured between Switch A and Switch B, as shown in Figure 20-7.
Page 663: Configuring Frame Relay To Atm Network Interworking Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections After you complete the soft VC configuration, proceed to Display Frame Relay Interworking Soft PVCs, page 20-39 and verify the connection. Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Network Interworking Soft PVCs This section describes how to configure a Frame Relay to ATM network interworking soft permanent virtual channel (soft PVC).
Page 664 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections The row index for rx-cttr and tx-cttr must be configured before using this optional parameter. See Note Chapter 9, “Configuring Resource Management.” To configure a soft PVC with priority, refer to “Configuring Soft PVCs and PVPs with Priority.”...
Page 665: Configuring Frame Relay To Atm Service Interworking Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Service Interworking Soft PVCs This section describes configuring a Frame Relay to ATM service interworking soft PVC terminating on an ATM interface.
Page 666 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections If the interworking soft PVC terminates on an ATM interface, the default interworking type is service Note interworking in translation mode. Frame Relay to ATM Service Interworking Soft PVC Configuration Example Use the following steps to configure the service interworking soft PVC between Switch A and switch B as shown in Figure...
Page 667: Display Frame Relay Interworking Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Display Frame Relay Interworking Soft PVCs To display your Frame Relay interworking soft PVCs configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show vc [interface {atm card/subcard/port Shows the PVC interface configuration.
Page 668: Standard Signalling For Frame Relay Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Standard Signalling for Frame Relay Soft PVCs Standards-based signalling for Frame-Relay Soft PVCs requires using new fields in the calling and called Soft PVC Information Elements (IEs) to convey the local and remote Data Link Control Identifiers (DLCI).
Page 669: Configuring A Frame Relay Interface With Route Optimization
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections Soft PVC route optimization should not be configured with constant bit rate (CBR) connections. Note Configuring a Frame Relay Interface with Route Optimization Soft PVC route optimization must be enabled and configured to determine the point at which a better route is found and the old route is reconfigured.
Page 670 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Virtual Connections interface Serial1/0/0:1 description Engineering connections no ip address no ip directed-broadcast encapsulation frame-relay IETF no arp frame-relay no snmp trap link-status frame-relay intf-type nni atm route-optimization soft-connection interval 30 time-of-day 18:0 5:0 Switch# show interfaces serial 3/0/0:1 Serial3/0/0:1 is up, line protocol is up...
Page 671: Respecifying Existing Frame Relay To Atm Interworking Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Respecifying Existing Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Soft PVCs Respecifying Existing Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Soft PVCs For existing Frame Relay to ATM interworking soft permanent virtual channels (soft PVCs), a connection is disabled to prevent an explicit path from being used for routing while it is reconfigured.
Page 672: Overflow Queuing Functional Image Requirements
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing This section includes the following: Overflow Queuing Functional Image Requirements, page 20-44 • Configuring Overflow Queuing on Frame Relay to ATM PVCs, page 20-44 • Configuring Overflow Queuing on Frame Relay to Frame Relay PVCs, page 20-46 •...
Page 673: Service Internetworking Pvc Connections
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Example The following example shows how to enable overflow queuing on a network internetworking PVC cross connected between serial interface 11/1/0:9, DLCI = 100 and ATM interface 0/0/0, VPI = 1, VCI = 100: Switch(config)# interface serial11/1/0:9 Switch(config-if)# frame-relay pvc 100 accept-overflow enable rx-cttr 100 tx-cttr 100 network interface atm 0/0/0 1 100...
Page 674: Configuring Overflow Queuing On Frame Relay To Frame Relay Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Configuring Overflow Queuing on Frame Relay to Frame Relay PVCs To configure overflow queuing on a Frame Relay transit PVC, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose...
Page 675: Configuring Overflow Queuing On Frame Relay To Atm Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Disabled—Enabled • Disabled—Disabled • Disabled—Inherited • Disabled—Not mentioned • Inherited—Enabled • • Inherited—Disabled • Inherited—Inherited • Inherited—Not mentioned Not mentioned—Enabled • Not mentioned—Disabled • Not mentioned—Inherited •...
Page 676: Configuring Overflow Queuing On Frame Relay To Frame Relay Soft Pvcs
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Command Purpose Step 6 Switch(config)# interface serial Selects the source Frame Relay port and channel card/subcard/port:cgn group number. Switch(config-if)# Step 7 Switch(config-if)# frame-relay soft-vc dlci-a Configures a network interworking soft PVC [accept-overflow {enable | disable | inherit}] terminating on an ATM interface.
Page 677: Displaying Overflow Queuing Configuration At The Vc Level
Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Command Purpose Step 6 Switch(config)# interface serial Selects the source Frame Relay port and channel card/subcard/port:cgn group number. Switch(config-if)# Step 7 Switch(config-if)# frame-relay soft-vc Configures a network interworking soft PVC [accept-overflow {enable | disable | inherit}] terminating on a Frame Relay serial interface.
Page 678 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Usage-Parameter-Control (UPC): tag-drop pvc-create-time : 16:26:00 Time-since-last-status-change : 16:25:54 Interworking Function Type : network de-bit Mapping : map-clp-or-de clp-bit Mapping : map-de ATM-P Interface: ATM-P1/0/0, Type: ATM-PSEUDO ATM-P VPI = 1 ATM-P VCI = 132 ATM-P Connection Status: UP...
Page 679 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Cross-connect-DLCI = 201 Cross-connect-UPC: tag-drop Transmit Direction : Total tx Frames Tota tx Bytes Discarded tx Frames Discarded tx Bytes Total Tx Frames with DE Total Tx Frames with FECN Tx Frames with FECN Tagged Locally Total Tx Frames with BECN Tx Frames with BECN Tagged Locally...
Page 680 LMI enq recvd 582, LMI stat sent 582, LMI upd sent 0, DCE LMI up LMI DLCI 1023 LMI type is CISCO frame relay NNI Broadcast queue 0/64, broadcasts sent/dropped 0/0, interface broadcasts 0 Last input 00:00:03, output 00:00:03, output hang never Last clearing of "show interface"...
Page 681 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Frames Discarded Due to Illegal Length: 0 Frames Received with unknown DLCI: 0 Frames with illegal Header : 0 Transmit Frames with FECN set :0, BECN Set :4175 Transmit Frames Tagged FECN : 0 BECN : 0 Transmit Frames Discarded due to No buffers : 0 The following example displays the overflow queuing configuration of serial interface 1/0/0:1:...
Page 682 Chapter 20 Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring Overflow Queuing Tx Frames with BECN Tagged Locally Receive Direction : Rx Frames Rx Bytes Rx Frames Discarded Rx Bytes Discarded Total Rx Frames with DE Rx Frames with DE Tagged Locally Total Rx Frames with FECN Rx Frames with FECN Tagged Locally Total Rx Frames with BECN...
Page 683: Overview Of Ima
For hardware installation and cabling instructions, refer to the ATM and Layer 3 Port Adapter and Interface Module Installation Guide. For more information on how to configure your IMA-specific network equipment, refer to the Cisco IOS publications on the Documentation CD-ROM.
Page 684 Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Overview of IMA differential delay compensation and recombines the cells into the original ATM cell stream while allowing minimal cell delay variation (CDV). The IMA process of splitting and recombining the ATM cell stream is as transparent to the layer above as a traditional single-link physical layer interface. Figure 21-1 illustrates the configuration of the T1 IMA port adapters (with eight ports each) on two switches which create a virtual IMA group connection.
Page 685: C H A P T E R 21 Configuring Ima Port Adapter Interfaces
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the T1/E1 IMA Port Adapter Figure 21-2 IMA Frames IMA frame 0 IMA frame 1 IMA frame 2 Interface 0/0/1 ICP0 F ATM F ICP1 F ATM F ICP2 F ATM ATM M-1 0 M-1 0 Interface 0/0/2...
Page 686: Configuring The T1/E1 Ima Interface
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the T1/E1 IMA Port Adapter Clock source = system clock • Transmit clock source = network derived • Loopback = no loopback • BERT = disabled • The following port adapter types have specific defaults assigned. T1 port adapter: •...
Page 687: Displaying The T1/E1 Ima Interface Configuration
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring the T1/E1 IMA Port Adapter Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(config-if)# clock source {free-running | Configures the type of clocking. loop-timed | network-derived} Step 4 Switch(config-if)# framing {esfadm | sfadm} Modifies the T1 IMA framing type. Switch(config-if)# framing {cleare1 | crc4adm | Modifies the E1 IMA framing type.
Page 688: Configuring Ima Group Functions
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Port status:Good Signal Loopback:None Flags:8000 fdl is DISABLED Yellow alarm enabled in both tx and rx linecode is B8ZS TX Led: Traffic Pattern RX Led: Traffic Pattern CD Led: Green TX clock source: free-running T1 Framing Mode:...
Page 689 Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Command Purpose Step 3 Switch(config-if)# ima-group number Assigns the interface to an IMA group number. Step 4 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Reenables the interface. Step 5 Switch(config-if)# exit Returns to global configuration mode. Switch(config)# Step 6 Switch(config)# interface atm card/subcard/imagroup...
Page 690: Adding An Interface To An Existing Ima Group
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Adding an Interface to an Existing IMA Group An interface can be added to an existing IMA group link by assigning the IMA group number. You must configure the IMA group at both ends of the physical connection. Note To configure the interfaces at both ends of the connection as members of an existing IMA group, perform the following steps, beginning in global configuration mode:...
Page 691: Displaying The Ima Group Configuration
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Displaying the IMA Group Configuration To display the IMA group configuration, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show ima interface [atm card/subcard/imagroup Displays IMA group interface configuration [detailed]] and status.
Page 692: Deleting An Interface From An Ima Group
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Auto-config: enabled AutoCfgState: completed IF-Side: Network IF-type: Uni-type: not applicable Uni-version: not applicable Max-VPI-bits: Max-VCI-bits: Max-VP: Max-VC: 16383 ConfMaxSvpcVpi: 255 CurrMaxSvpcVpi: 255 ConfMaxSvccVpi: 255 CurrMaxSvccVpi: 255 ConfMinSvccVci: 35 CurrMinSvccVci: 35 Svc Upc Intent: pass Signalling: Enabled...
Page 693: Confirming The Interface Deletion
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Confirming the Interface Deletion To confirm the interface deletion from the IMA group, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show ima interface atm card/subcard/port Displays IMA group interface configuration and status.
Page 694 Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Functions Switch(config-if)# ima-group 0 Switch(config-if)# no shut Switch(config-if)# exit Switch(config)# interface atm 0/0/ima0 Switch(config-if)# no shut Switch(config-if)# end Switch# show ima interface atm 0/0/ima0 ATM0/0/ima0 is up Group Index State: NearEnd = operational, FarEnd = operational FailureStatus = noFailure IMA Group Current Configuration:...
Page 695: Configuring Ima Group Parameters
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Parameters Configuring IMA Group Parameters This section describes how to configure inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) group parameters after configuring an IMA group at the interface level. These tasks include configuring active minimum links, interface clock mode, link differential delay, frame length, and test pattern.
Page 696: Configuring Ima Group Interface Clock Mode
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Parameters Example The following example shows the IMA group interface minimum active links configuration: SwitchA# show ima interface ATM0/0/ima1 is up Group Index State: NearEnd = operational, FarEnd = operational FailureStatus = noFailure IMA Group Current Configuration:...
Page 697: Displaying The Ima Group Interface Clock Mode Configuration
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Parameters Displaying the IMA Group Interface Clock Mode Configuration To display the IMA group transmit clock mode configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose show ima interface [atm card/subcard/imagroup Displays IMA group interface configuration [detailed]] and status.
Page 698: Displaying The Ima Group Link Differential Delay Configuration
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Parameters Example The following example shows how to configure the maximum allowable differential delay to 100 milliseconds between all interfaces assigned to the IMA group. SwitchA(config)# interface atm 0/0/ima1 SwitchA(config-if)# ima differential-delay-maximum 100 Displaying the IMA Group Link Differential Delay Configuration To display the IMA group maximum differential delay configuration, use the following EXEC command:...
Page 699: Displaying The Ima Group Frame Length Configuration
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Parameters Example The following example shows how to configure the frame length transmitted as 256 cells for IMA group 0/0/ima1: SwitchA(config)# interface atm 0/0/ima1 SwitchA(config-if)# ima frame-length 256 Displaying the IMA Group Frame Length Configuration To display the IMA group frame length configuration, use the following EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 700: Displaying The Ima Group Test Pattern Configuration
Chapter 21 Configuring IMA Port Adapter Interfaces Configuring IMA Group Parameters Command Purpose Step 2 Switch(config-if)# ima test [link link-value] Specifies the specific link and pattern or test [pattern pattern-value] pattern only for the IMA group. Step 3 Switch(config-if)# no ima test Stops the test on the IMA group.
Page 701: About Quality Of Service
C H A P T E R Configuring Quality of Service This chapter describes the quality of service (QoS) features built into your switch router and includes information on how to configure the QoS functionality. This chapter includes the following sections: About Quality of Service, page 22-1 •...
Page 702: Chapter 22 Configuring Quality Of Service
The Cisco IOS QoS feature that implements best-effort service is first-in, first-out (FIFO) queueing. Best-effort service is suitable for a wide range of network applications such as general file transfers or e-mail.
Page 703: About Quality Of Service Mechanisms
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service IP Precedence Based Class of Service (CoS) About Quality of Service Mechanisms The Catalyst 8540 campus switch router provides extensive core Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms that are built into the switch router architecture. These functions ensure policy enforcement and queuing of the ingress port, as well as weighted round-robin (WRR) scheduling at the egress port.
Page 704: About Scheduling And Weighted Round-Robin
26 Mbps. Configuring Precedence to WRR Scheduling This section describes the Cisco IOS commands necessary to configure QoS mapping at the system and interface levels. The commands described in this section are unique to the Layer 3 switching software.
Page 705: Mapping Qos Scheduling At The Interface Level
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service IP Precedence Based Class of Service (CoS) Table 22-2 IP Precedence and Default WRR Weights IP Precedence WRR Weight For a complete description of the qos mapping precedence command, see the ATM and Layer 3 Switch Router Command Reference.
Page 706: Verifying The Qos Configuration
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service About IP QoS on the Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces Verifying the QoS Configuration To verify the QoS configuration, use the following commands: Command Purpose show qos switching Displays whether QoS-based switching is enabled.
Page 707: Packet Classification
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service About IP QoS on the Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces Figure 22-1 Architectural Model Forwarding Engine Marker MF-Classifier Queue BA-Classifier Meter/Policer Selector Classifier Queuing Ingress Traffic Conditioner Switch Fabric Optional Scheduling Egress Traffic Conditioner Congestion...
Page 708: Traffic Conditioning
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service About IP QoS on the Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces If no match with a permit action is encountered and all the configured classifiers’ ACEs • have been examined, the packet is assumed to be in the well known default class (class-default).
Page 709: Per Hop Behavior Definition
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service About IP QoS on the Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces There must be at least one traffic conditioning element associated with every classifier in an input policy Note map. Per Hop Behavior Definition Per Hop Behavior or PHB is the externally observable forwarding behavior (in terms of buffer/bandwidth resource allocation), applied to a particular traffic class.
Page 710: Buffer Management
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service About IP QoS on the Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces Figure 22-3 shows queue-implementation for each physical interface. Each queue can be assigned to a particular output traffic class. Figure 22-3 Queue Implementation Queue 3 = Class 3 (IP traffic) Input...
Page 711: Congestion Control
This section describes the tasks for configuring IP QoS functionality with the Modular QoS CLI. For a complete description of the commands mentioned in this section, refer to the Cisco IOS Quality of Service Solutions Command Reference. The commands are listed alphabetically within the guide. To locate documentation of a specific command, use the command reference, master index, or on-line search.
Page 712: Input Policy
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service IP QoS—Functional Differences Between Modules (Catalyst 8540 MSR) The IP QoS feature is only applicable for enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and enhanced ATM Router Modules Note installed in the Catalyst 8540 MSR chassis. Input Policy All functionality, such as classification, marking, metering, and policing, is the same for both the enhanced Gigabit Ethernet (XPIF based) interface module and the enhanced ATM Router Module.
Page 713 Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service IP QoS—Functional Differences Between Modules (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Figure 22-4 Previous Scheduler Class Weight Diagram Output VC Scheduler Scheduler Output VC weight class weight weight MPLS_Available VBR-rt Broute-VCs from Layer 3 VBR-nrt interface 1 MPLS_Standard MPLS_Premium MPLS_Control...
Page 714 VCs of the same class. Configuring output VC weight might be necessary because of different PCR and SCR values for the same class of VCs. Scheduler class weight for 2, 3, and 5 are enabled by default in Cisco IOS Release 12.1(14)EB. No Note configuration is required.
Page 715: Displaying The Ip Qos Configuration
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service IP QoS—Functional Differences Between Modules (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Example The following example shows how to configure service class 2 and WRR weight 2: Switch(config)# interface atm 0/0/1 Switch(config-if)# atm service-class 2 wrr-weight 2 To configure the output VC, use the following commands: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 716: Supported And Unsupported Features
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service IP QoS—Functional Differences Between Modules (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Switch# The following example uses the show atm interface resource command to show the amount of bandwidth allocated for IP QoS: Switch# show atm interface resource atm 11/0/1 Resource Management configuration: CAC Configuration to account for Framing Overhead : Disabled Pacing: disabled...
Page 717: Configuring Ip Qos On Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet And Enhanced Atm Router Module Interfaces
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring IP QoS on Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces Multifield classifiers in output policy • Workaround: none Hierarchical policy maps • Workaround: none Strict priority and low latency queueing (LLQ) •...
Page 718: Creating A Service Policy
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring IP QoS on Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces A traffic class consists of two major elements: a name • one or more match criteria / rules • The following commands describe how to configure a traffic class in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1...
Page 719 Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring IP QoS on Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces a set of classifiers (class-maps) • their associated traffic conditioners (for input policy maps) or per hop behavior (PHB) definitions • (for output policy maps).
Page 720 Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring IP QoS on Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces The following commands show how to configure a service policy on an egress interface (output policy map): Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config) # policy-map Specifies the name of the service policy to configure.
Page 721: Configuring Buffer-Groups
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring IP QoS on Enhanced Gigabit Ethernet and Enhanced ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Buffer-Groups Buffer groups are global resources that can be configured to be shared among output traffic classes. Four possible buffer groups are available. Command Purpose buffer-group buffer-group-number discard-limit...
Page 722: Tcam Region For Ip Qos
Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Verifying the IP QoS Configuration Switch(config-if)# service-policy input in-policy TCAM Region for IP QoS By default, there is no space reserved for IP QoS in TCAM. There needs to be a minimum of 512 entries for the IP QoS region in TCAM, for IP QoS functionality to be enabled.
Page 723 Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Verifying the IP QoS Configuration Policy Map one class set ip dscp unchanged class set ip dscp 63 class three set ip precedence 0 class four set ip precedence 7 class five set ip dscp 22 class set ip precedence unchanged class...
Page 724 Chapter 22 Configuring Quality of Service Verifying the IP QoS Configuration class set ip precedence 3 The following example shows all class maps configured: Switch# show class-map Class Map match-all nine (id 10) Match access-group Class Map match-all four (id 5) Match access-group Match access-group Match access-group...
Page 725: About The Atm Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module
C H A P T E R Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module This chapter describes the features and configuration procedures for the ATM traffic-shaping carrier module (TSCAM). The TSCAM is available on the Catalyst 8510 MSR and the LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers.
Page 726: Atm Tscam Features
ATM network. The TSCAM helps ensure that the maximum number of cells transmit through to the public network. Figure 23-1 TSCAM on an Enterprise Private Network Layer 3 switches Public Enterprise Private Network Cisco 7xxx Drop/Tag routers Public UNI TSCAM Catalyst 8510 MSR Switch Router ATM TSCAM Features...
Page 727: C H A P T E R 23 Configuring The Atm Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module
Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Hardware and Software Restrictions Traffic shaping for VBR and best-effort traffic • Up to four TSCAMs in a chassis • Up to four ports 256K cell buffers share • Hardware and Software Restrictions This section lists the hardware and software restrictions for the TSCAM.
Page 728: About Interface Congestion Thresholds
Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Configuring the ATM TSCAM Each TSCAM requires 2 MB of contiguous main memory availability in the system. • The maximum rate at which a VC can be shaped on an OC-12 interface is 595,085 Kbps. •...
Page 729: Configuring Maximum Thresholds
Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Configuring Maximum Thresholds Any changes to the traffic-shaping configuration take effect upon saving the configurations to NVRAM Note and reloading the switch, or upon performing an OIR on the port adapter in subcard 0 of the ATM TSCAM.
Page 730: Configuring Maximum Thresholds For Vcs
Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Configuring Maximum Thresholds Example The following example shows how to configure a traffic-shaping threshold for a traffic class: Switch# show atm vc interface atm 0/0/0 Interface Type X-Interface X-VPI X-VCI Encap Status ATM0/0/0 ATM0 QSAAL...
Page 731: Displaying Traffic-Shaping Configurations
Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Displaying Traffic-Shaping Configurations Displaying Traffic-Shaping Configurations To show the traffic-shaping configuration of the switch, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose Switch# show atm traffic shaping slot slot Verifies that traffic shaping is enabled on a slot. Switch# show atm interface resource atm Verifies the traffic-shaping threshold slot/subslot/port...
Page 732 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Displaying Traffic-Shaping Configurations Available bit rates (in Kbps): 147743 cbr RX, 147743 cbr TX, 147743 vbr RX, 147743 vbr TX, 147743 abr RX, 147743 abr TX, 147743 ubr RX, 147743 ubr TX Allocated bit rates: 0 cbr RX, 0 cbr TX, 0 vbr RX, 0 vbr TX, 0 abr RX, 0 abr TX, 0 ubr RX, 0 ubr TX...
Page 733: Traffic-Shaping Granularity Tables
Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables This section lists the following granularity tables for configuring traffic-shaping rates on ATM interfaces: Table 23-2Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells •...
Page 734 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 97646 97223 96804 96388 95976 95568 95163 94762 94363 93969 93577 93189 92804...
Page 735 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 40539 40466 40393 40321 40248 40176 40105 40033 39962 39891 39820 39750 39680...
Page 736 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 25580 25550 25521 25492 25464 25435 25406 25377 25349 25320 25291 25263 25235...
Page 737 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 18685 18669 18654 18638 18623 18607 18592 18576 18561 18546 18531 18515 18500...
Page 738 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 14718 14708 14698 14689 14679 14670 14660 14650 14641 14631 14622 14612 14603...
Page 739 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 12140 12134 12127 12121 12114 12107 12101 12094 12088 12081 12075 12068 12062...
Page 740 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 10331 10326 10321 10317 10312 10307 10303 10298 10293 10288 10284 10279 10274...
Page 741 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 8991 8987 8984 8980 8977 8973 8969 8966 8962 8959 8955 8952 8948...
Page 742 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 7959 7956 7953 7950 7948 7945 7942 7939 7936 7934 7931 7928 7925...
Page 743 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 7139 7137 7135 7132 7130 7128 7126 7123 7121 7119 7117 7114 7112...
Page 744 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 6473 6471 6469 6467 6465 6463 6461 6460 6458 6456 6454 6452 6450...
Page 745 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 5920 5918 5917 5915 5914 5912 5911 5909 5907 5906 5904 5903 5901...
Page 746 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 4081 4034 3988 3943 3900 3857 3815 3774 3734 3694 3656 3618 3581...
Page 747 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-23 OL-7396-01...
Page 748 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-24 OL-7396-01...
Page 749 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-2 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) Table 23-3 shows the DS3, E3, E1 and T1 rates for VBR connections that are shaped using their PCR, SCR and MBS parameters (the default shaping mode).
Page 750 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-3 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR and MBS) Values for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 1335 1330 1325 1320 1315 1310 1305 1300 1295 1291 1286 1281...
Page 751 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-3 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR and MBS) Values for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-27 OL-7396-01...
Page 752 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-3 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR and MBS) Values for DS3, E3, E1, and T1 (Cells Per Second) (continued) Table 23-4 shows the OC-3c rates for best-effort connections and VBR connections when shaped using PCR-only mode.
Page 753 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 96414 96005 95600 95198 94800 94405 94013 93625 93240 92857 92478 92102 91730 91360 90993 90629 90268 89910...
Page 754 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 39890 39820 39750 39680 39611 39542 39473 39404 39336 39268 39200 39132 39064 38997 38930 38863 38797 38731...
Page 755 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 25147 25119 25091 25064 25036 25008 24981 24953 24926 24898 24871 24844 24817 24789 24762 24735 24708 24681...
Page 756 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 18361 18346 18331 18317 18302 18287 18272 18258 18243 18228 18214 18199 18184 18170 18155 18141 18126 18112...
Page 757 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 14459 14450 14441 14432 14423 14413 14404 14395 14386 14377 14368 14359 14350 14340 14331 14322 14313 14304...
Page 758 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 11925 11919 11913 11906 11900 11894 11888 11882 11875 11869 11863 11857 11850 11844 11838 11832 11826 11820...
Page 759 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 10147 10142 10138 10133 10129 10124 10120 10115 10111 10106 10102 10097 10093 10088 10084 10079 10075 10070...
Page 760 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 8830 8827 8823 8820 8816 8813 8810 8806 8803 8799 8796 8793 8789 8786 8782 8779 8776 8772...
Page 761 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 7816 7813 7811 7808 7805 7803 7800 7797 7794 7792 7789 7786 7784 7781 7778 7776 7773 7770...
Page 762 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 7011 7009 7006 7004 7002 7000 6998 6996 6993 6991 6989 6987 6985 6983 6981 6978 6976 6974...
Page 763 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 6356 6354 6352 6351 6349 6347 6345 6343 6342 6340 6338 6336 6335 6333 6331 6329 6328 6326...
Page 764 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 5813 5811 5810 5809 5807 5806 5804 5803 5801 5800 5798 5797 5795 5794 5792 5791 5789 5788...
Page 765 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) 1779 1771 1762 1753 1744 1736 1727 1719 1711 1703 1694 1686 1678 1670 1663 1655 1647 1639...
Page 766 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-42 OL-7396-01...
Page 767 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-4 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (Pcr-Only Mode) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) Table 23-5 shows the DS3, E3, E1 and T1 rates for VBR connections that are shaped using their PCR, SCR and MBS parameters (the default shaping mode).
Page 768 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-5 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR and MBS) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) (continued) 6942 6809 6680 6556 6437 6322 6211 6104 6001 5901 5804 5710 5620 5532 5447 5364...
Page 769 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-5 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR and MBS) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) (continued) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-45 OL-7396-01...
Page 770 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-5 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR and MBS) Rates for OC-3c (Cells Per Second) (continued) Table 23-6 shows the OC-12 rates for best-effort connections and VBR connections when shaped using PCR-only mode.
Page 771 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 1403649 1382055 1361115 1340800 1321082 1301936 1283337 1265262 1247688 1230597 1213967 1197781 1182021 1166670 1151712 1137134 1122920 1109056 1095531 1082332 1069447 1056866 1044576 1032570 1020836 1009366 998151 987182 976452...
Page 772 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 231530 230935 230343 229754 229168 228585 228004 227427 226853 226281 225713 225147 224584 224024 223467 222912 222361 221812...
Page 773 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 124596 124424 124252 124080 123909 123738 123568 123398 123229 123060 122892 122724 122556 122390 122223 122057 121891 121726...
Page 774 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 85232 85151 85070 84990 84909 84829 84749 84669 84590 84510 84431 84351 84272 84193 84114 84036 83957 83879...
Page 775 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 64769 64722 64675 64629 64582 64536 64490 64443 64397 64351 64305 64259 64213 64167 64122 64076 64030 63984...
Page 776 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 52229 52199 52169 52138 52108 52078 52048 52018 51987 51957 51927 51897 51867 51838 51808 51778 51748 51718...
Page 777 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 43758 43736 43715 43694 43673 43651 43630 43609 43588 43567 43546 43524 43503 43482 43461 43440 43419 43398...
Page 778 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 37651 37635 37619 37603 37588 37572 37556 37541 37525 37509 37494 37478 37462 37447 37431 37416 37400 37384...
Page 779 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 33040 33028 33015 33003 32991 32979 32967 32955 32943 32931 32919 32907 32895 32882 32870 32858 32846 32834...
Page 780 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 29435 29425 29416 29406 29396 29387 29377 29367 29358 29348 29339 29329 29320 29310 29300 29291 29281 29272...
Page 781 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 26539 26531 26524 26516 26508 26500 26492 26484 26477 26469 26461 26453 26445 26438 26430 26422 26414 26407...
Page 782 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 24162 24156 24149 24143 24136 24130 24123 24117 24110 24104 24097 24091 24085 24078 24072 24065 24059 24052...
Page 783 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 22176 22171 22165 22160 22154 22149 22143 22138 22132 22127 22122 22116 22111 22105 22100 22094 22089 22083...
Page 784 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 3988 3977 3966 3954 3943 3932 3921 3910 3900 3889 3878 3867 3857 3846 3836 3825 3815 3804...
Page 785 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 2050 2047 2044 2041 2038 2035 2032 2029 2026 2023 2020 2017 2014 2011 2009 2006 2003 2000...
Page 786 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 1379 1378 1377 1375 1374 1373 1371 1370 1369 1367 1366 1365 1363 1362 1361 1359 1358 1357...
Page 787 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) 1019 1018 1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1009 1008 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002...
Page 788 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-64 OL-7396-01...
Page 789 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-6 Best-Effort and VBR Shaping (PCR-Only Mode) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) Table 23-7 shows the OC-12 rates for VBR connections that are shaped using their PCR, SCR and MBS parameters (the default shaping mode).
Page 790 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-7 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR, and MBS) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 5180 5161 5142 5123 5105 5086 5068 5050 5031 5014 4996 4978 4960 4943 4926 4908...
Page 791 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-7 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR, and MBS) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 2324 2321 2317 2313 2309 2305 2302 2298 2294 2290 2287 2283 2279 2275 2272 2268...
Page 792 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-7 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR, and MBS) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 1499 1497 1495 1494 1492 1491 1489 1487 1486 1484 1483 1481 1480 1478 1476 1475...
Page 793 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-7 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR, and MBS) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) (continued) 1100 1099 1098 1097 1096 1095 1094 1093 1092 1091 1090 1089 1088 1087 1086 1085...
Page 794 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-7 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR, and MBS) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) (continued) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-70 OL-7396-01...
Page 795 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables Table 23-7 VBR Shaping (Using PCR, SCR, and MBS) Rates for OC-12 (Cells Per Second) (continued) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-71 OL-7396-01...
Page 796 Chapter 23 Configuring the ATM Traffic-Shaping Carrier Module Traffic-shaping Granularity Tables ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 23-72 OL-7396-01...
Page 797: Rate Limiting
For further information about the commands used in this chapter, refer to the ATM and Layer 3 Switch Note Router Command Reference and the Cisco IOS Quality of Service Solutions Command Reference. This chapter includes the following sections: Rate Limiting, page 24-1 •...
Page 798: Configuring Rate Limiting
Configures rate limiting on an interface. For more detailed configuration information, refer to the “Policing and Shaping Overview” section of the Cisco IOS Quality of Service Solutions Configuration Guide. Example The following is an example of how to configure rate limiting on your switch router: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Page 799: C H A P T E R 24 Configuring Rate Limiting And Traffic Shaping
Chapter 24 Configuring Rate Limiting and Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping Features Traffic shaping on the Catalyst 8500 switch router includes the following features: This feature is supported on the following interface modules: • Eight-Port 10/100BASE-T Fast Ethernet Interface Modules – 16-Port 10/100BASE-T Fast Ethernet Interface Modules –...
Page 800: Configuring Rate Limiting
Chapter 24 Configuring Rate Limiting and Traffic Shaping Displaying the Configurations Example The following is an example of how to configure rate limiting on your switch router: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z Router(config)# interface f0/0/0 Router(config-if)# traffic-shape rate 1000000 20000 Router(config-if)# exit Displaying the Configurations...
Page 801 Chapter 24 Configuring Rate Limiting and Traffic Shaping Displaying the Configurations Example The following is an example of how to display the QoS output parameters for an interface: Router# show epc port-qos interface f9/0/3 out Output Port QoS Parameters: Current number of tokens (tokens): 65352 Configured burst size...
Page 802: Displaying The Configurations
Chapter 24 Configuring Rate Limiting and Traffic Shaping Displaying the Configurations ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 24-6 OL-7396-01...
Page 803: Features
C H A P T E R Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces This chapter describes steps required to configure the ATM router module on the Catalyst 8540 MSR, Catalyst 8510 MSR, and LightStream 1010 ATM switch routers, and the enhanced ATM router module for the Catalyst 8540 MSR.
Page 804: Overview Of The Atm Router Module
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Overview of the ATM Router Module Overview of the ATM Router Module The ATM router module allows you to integrate Layer 3 routing and ATM switching within a single chassis. When you install the ATM router module, you no longer need to choose either Layer 3 or ATM technology, as is frequently the case with enterprise, campus, and MAN applications.
Page 805: C H A P T E R 25 Configuring Atm Router Module Interfaces
Chapter 12, “Using Access Control,” and refer to the “Configuring IP Services” chapter in the Cisco IOS IP and IP Routing Configuration Guide. For information configuring on IPX ACLs, refer to the “Configuring Novell IPX” chapter in the Cisco IOS AppleTalk and Novell IPX Configuration Guide.
Page 806: Catalyst 8540 Msr Atm Router Module Features
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Overview of the ATM Router Module IP fragmentation support. • IP 6-path load balancing support. • Supports OAM-based PVC management. • Supports integrated routing and bridging (IRB). • Supports LANE clients (LECs). • •...
Page 807: Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010 Atm Router Module Features
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Hardware and Software Restrictions of the ATM Router Module The ATM router module has no external interfaces. All traffic is sent and received through internal interfaces to the switching fabric. The Catalyst 8540 MSR enhanced ATM router module has two internal ports.
Page 808: Catalyst 8540 Msr Enhanced Atm Router Module Software Restrictions
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Hardware and Software Restrictions of the ATM Router Module The ATM router module is only supported on ATM switches which have multiservice ATM Note switch processor installed. Catalyst 8540 MSR Enhanced ATM Router Module Software Restrictions The following software restrictions apply to the Catalyst 8540 MSR enhanced ATM router module: Use tag switching functionality with caution.
Page 809: Catalyst 8540 Msr Atm Router Module Software Restrictions
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Hardware and Software Restrictions of the ATM Router Module Catalyst 8540 MSR ATM Router Module Software Restrictions The following software restrictions apply to the Catalyst 8540 MSR ATM router module: Use tag switching functionality with caution. Do not distribute routes learned through tag switching •...
Page 810: Catalyst 8510 Msr Atm Router Module Software Restrictions
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Hardware and Software Restrictions of the ATM Router Module Catalyst 8510 MSR ATM Router Module Software Restrictions The following software restrictions apply to the Catalyst 8510 MSR enhanced ATM router module: Use tag switching functionality with caution. Do not distribute routes learned through tag switching •...
Page 811: Configuring Atm Router Module Interfaces
Configuration Guide, which is available on the Documentation CD-ROM that came with your ATM switch router, online at Cisco.com, or when ordered separately as a hard copy document. ATM router modules have internal interfaces, but no external ports. Use the interface atm Note card/subcard/port command to specify these interfaces.
Page 812: Default Atm Router Module Interface Configuration Without Autoconfiguration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring LECs on ATM Router Module Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Default ATM Router Module Interface Configuration Without Autoconfiguration If ILMI is disabled or if the connecting end node does not support ILMI, the following defaults are assigned to all ATM router module interfaces: ATM interface type = UNI •...
Page 813: Lec Configuration Examples
For performance reasons, avoid configuring the LANE server components on ATM switch routers. Caution Instead, configure the LANE server components on a router such as a Cisco 7500 series router or a Catalyst 5500 router with a LANE module installed.
Page 814: Lane Routing Over Atm
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring LECs on ATM Router Module Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) LANE Routing Over ATM The following example shows how to configure LANE routing over ATM using the ATM router module. Figure 25-3 shows an example of a network for LANE routing over ATM. Figure 25-3 Example Network for LANE Routing over ATM Catalyst 8540 MSR Router 1...
Page 815: Lane Routing From Atm To Ethernet
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring LECs on ATM Router Module Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) LANE Routing from ATM to Ethernet The following example shows how to configure LANE routing from ATM to Ethernet using the ATM router module. Figure 25-4 shows an example of a LANE network for LANE routing from ATM to Ethernet.
Page 816: Lane Bridging Between Atm And Ethernet
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring LECs on ATM Router Module Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) LANE Bridging Between ATM and Ethernet The following example show how to configure LANE bridging between ATM and Ethernet using the ATM router module. Figure 25-5 shows an example of a network for LANE bridging between ATM and Ethernet.
Page 817: Configuring Lecs And 1483 Pvcs On Enhanced Atm Router Module Interfaces
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring LECs on ATM Router Module Interfaces (Catalyst 8540 MSR) Router 2 Ethernet Interface Router2# configure terminal Router2(config)# interface ethernet 9/0/0 Router2(config-if)# bridge-group 1 Router2(config-if)# end Router2# Router 2 Bridge Interface Router2# configure terminal Router2(config)# interface BVI1 Router2(config-if)# ip address 130.2.3.4 255.255.255.0 Router2(config-if)# exit...
Page 818: Confirming The Lec Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Jumbo Frames Switch(config)# map-list net1011 Switch(config-map-list)# ip 2.0.0.2 atm-vc 101 Switch(config-map-list)# end Switch# Router 2 ATM Interface Router2# configure terminal Router2(config)# interface atm 3/0 Router2(config-if)# ip address 2.0.0.2 255.0.0.0 Router2(config-if)# no ip mroute-cache Router2(config-if)# atm pvc 1 0 5 qsaal Router2(config-if)# atm pvc 2 0 16 ilmi Router2(config-if)# map-group net1011...
Page 819: Displaying The Interface Mtu Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Jumbo Frames Jumbo frame support is only available on the following enhanced ATM router module and the two-port enhanced Gigabit Ethernet modules: C8540-ARM2—enhanced ATM Router Module with 64K, 128K, and 256K routing table entries •...
Page 820: Configuring Multiprotocol Encapsulation Over Atm
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Configuring Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM This section describes how to configure multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM, as defined in RFC 1483, on the ATM router module. The primary use of multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM, also know as RFC 1483, is carrying multiple Layer 3 and bridged frames over ATM.
Page 821: Multiprotocol Encapsulation Over Atm Configuration Example
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Switch(config-subif)# ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-subif)# map-group net1011 Switch(config-subif)# atm pvc 2 1011 interface atm 3/0/0 0 1011 encap aal5snap Switch(config-subif)# exit Switch(config)# map-list net1011 Switch(config-map-list)# ip 10.1.1.2 atm-vc 1011 Switch(config-map-list)# end Switch# Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Configuration Example...
Page 822: Configuring Classical Ip Over Atm In A Pvc Environment
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Classical IP over ATM in a PVC Environment Switch(config-if)# ip address 20.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# ipx network 2011 Switch(config-if)# end Switch# The VCI in the atm pvc command must match the atm-vc VCI in the map list. Note Ethernet Router RouterB# configure terminal...
Page 823: Configuring Classical Ip Over Atm In An Svc Environment
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Classical IP over ATM in an SVC Environment Configuring Classical IP over ATM in an SVC Environment This section describes how to configure classical IP over ATM in an SVC environment on your ATM router module.
Page 824: Nsap Address Example
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Classical IP over ATM in an SVC Environment NSAP Address Example Figure 25-8 shows three ATM switch routers and a router connected using classical IP over ATM. Figure 25-8 Classical IP over ATM Connection Setup Switch client B Router client C 123.233.45.3...
Page 825: Configuring As An Atm Arp Server
Configuring Classical IP over ATM in an SVC Environment Configuring as an ATM ARP Server Cisco’s implementation of the ATM ARP server supports a single, nonredundant server per LIS, and one ATM ARP server per subinterface. Thus, a single ATM switch router can support multiple ARP servers by using multiple interfaces.
Page 826: Displaying The Ip-Over-Atm Interface Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Classical IP over ATM in an SVC Environment Displaying the IP-over-ATM Interface Configuration To show the IP-over-ATM interface configuration, use the following EXEC commands: Command Purpose show atm arp-server Shows the ATM interface ARP configuration. show atm map Shows the ATM map list configuration.
Page 827: Configuring Bridging
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet Specifies the Fast Ethernet interface to configure. card/subcard/port Switch(config-if)# Step 6 Switch(config-if)# no cdp enable Disables Cisco Discovery Protocol on the interface. Step 7 Switch(config-if)# bridge-group number Assigns the interface to a bridge group. Step 8 Switch(config-if)# end Returns to global configuration mode.
Page 828: Configuring Packet Flooding On A Pvc
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Bridging Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/0/0 Switch(config-if)# no cdp enable Switch(config-if)# bridge-group 5 Switch(config-if)# end Switch(config)# bridge 5 protocol ieee Configuring Packet Flooding on a PVC Typically, a specific static map list configuration is not required for bridging to occur. In case of packet flooding, the bridging mechanism individually sends the packet to be flooded on all PVCs configured on the interface.
Page 829: Displaying The Bridging Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring Bridging For more information about bridging, refer to the Layer 3 Software Configuration Guide. Note Displaying the Bridging Configuration To display the bridging configuration on the ATM router module interface, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose...
Page 830: Configuring Ip Multicast
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring IP Multicast Configuring IP Multicast To configure IP multicast over an RFC 1483 permanent virtual connection (PVC) on an ATM router module, use the following commands, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# ip multicast-routing...
Page 831: Features Supported
{input | output} rate burst Configures rate limiting on an interface. For more detailed configuration information, refer to the “Policing and Shaping Overview” section of the Cisco IOS Quality of Service Solutions Configuration Guide. ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 25-29...
Page 832: Configuring Vc Bundling
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling Example The following is an example of how to configure rate limiting on your switch router: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z Router(config)# interface f0/0/0 Router(config-if)# rate-limit input 1000000 20000 Router(config-if)# rate-limit output 100000 30000 Router(config-if)# exit...
Page 833: Vc Bundle Examples
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling To configure the VC bundle, use the following commands, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# interface atm Creates the ATM Router Module point-to-multipoint card/subcard/port.subinterface# multipoint subinterface and enters subinterface mode. Switch(config-subif)# Step 2 Switch(config-subif)# ip address ip-address mask...
Page 834 VC to be redirected to an alternate VC within the VC bundle. In this example, if PVC 2, 200 fails it is bumped to the VC with IP precedence 3. The following example configures eight PVCs as members of a VC bundle named cisco. Switch(config)# interface atm 9/0/0.1 multipoint Switch(config-subif)# ip address 1.1.1.9 255.0.0.0...
Page 835: Displaying The Vc Bundle Configuration
0 / Yes ATM0/0/0 / Yes Switch# In the following example, the show atm bundle stat command displays the statistics for the VC bundle: Switch# show atm bundle cisco stat cisco on ATM12/0/0.1: UP Rx-cells Tx-cells X-Interface X-VPI X-VCI Rx-cells...
Page 836: Configuring Vc Bundling With Ip And Atm Qos
In the following example, the show running-config command displays the configuration for the VC bundle: Switch# show running-config interface atm11/0/0.1 Building configuration... Current configuration : 686 bytes interface ATM11/0/0.1 multipoint ip address 1.1.1.9 255.0.0.0 bundle cisco protocol ip inarp pvc-bundle 2 200 pd on interface ATM0/0/0 0 200 precedence 7 bump explicit 3...
Page 837 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Configuring IP to ATM QoS and VC bundling on the enhanced ATM router module requires the steps in the following sections: “Configure Input IP Processing” •...
Page 838: Configure Input Ip Processing
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Figure 25-11 VC Bundle Example Configuration with IP to ATM QoS Catalyst 8540 Switch 1 ATM 0/0/0 ARM II ATM 9/0/0 ARM II VC Bundle GigabitEthernet VPI = 2 VCI 11/0/0...
Page 839: Configure The Ba Or Mf Classifiers
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Configure the BA or MF Classifiers Classifiers read an IP packet header and can classify packets based on the IP source or destination address, TCP or UDP source or destination port, and/or the Layer 4 protocol. These are called Multi-Field (MF) classifiers.
Page 840: Displaying The Ba Or Mf Classifier Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Displaying the BA or MF Classifier Configuration To display the MF or BA classifier configuration on the ATM router module interface, use the following privileged EXEC commands: Command Purpose show class-map [class-name]...
Page 841 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Example The following example maps the voice packets signaling packets to a policy map from the previously configured class may and sets the IP precedence value. Switch1(config)# policy-map ABC-signaling-mark Switch1(config-pmap)# class ABC-signaling-host Switch1(config-pmap-c)# set ip precedence 3...
Page 842: Displaying The Input Map Policy
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Displaying the Input Map Policy To display the input map policy configuration on the ATM router module interface, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show epc ipqos database interface Displays the input map policy configuration...
Page 843: Displaying The Ba Classifier Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Displaying the BA Classifier Configuration To display the BA classifier configuration on the ATM router module interface, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show class-map [class-name] Displays the class map information.
Page 844 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS To configure the bandwidth associated with each of the four classes, use the following commands, beginning in global configuration mode: Command Purpose Step 1 Switch(config)# policy-map policy-map-name Specifies the policy map name and changes to policy map configuration mode.
Page 845: Displaying The Policy Map Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Displaying the Policy Map Configuration To display the policy map configuration, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show policy-map [policy-map-name] Displays the policy map information. Example In the following example, the show policy-map command displays the configuration of the policy-map arm2-switch1:...
Page 846: Displaying The Output Policy Interface Configuration
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Displaying the Output Policy Interface Configuration To display the policy map configuration on the enhanced ATM router module interface, use the following privileged EXEC command: Command Purpose show epc ipqos output interface...
Page 847: Creating Pvcs And Configuring Vc Bundle On Enhanced Atm Router Module
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Switch1# The following command confirms that the connection traffic table rows were created as needed for the ATM connection between Switch 1 and Switch 2: Switch1# show atm connection-traffic-table Service-category scr/mcr...
Page 848 Switch(config)# interface atm 9/0/0.1 multipoint Switch(config-subif)# description Connection to Switch2 Switch(config-subif)# ip address 3.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 Switch(config-subif)# bundle cisco Switch(config-if-atm-bundle)# protocol ip inarp Switch(config-if-atm-bundle)# oam-bundle manage broadcast Switch(config-if-atm-bundle)# pvc-bundle 2 200 pd on wrr-weight 2 rx-cttr 301 tx-cttr 301 interface atm 0/0/0.1 2 300...
Page 849: Calculating The Scheduler Class Weights
Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Calculating the Scheduler Class Weights Scheduling is part of the per hop behavior and the scheduler is the mechanism that ultimately provides the QoS guarantees as it operates on the outgoing traffic. There are eight scheduler classes available on the switch module controlling the enhanced ATM router module.
Page 850 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Because the enhanced ATM router module must schedule traffic received from both ATM VCs and Layer 3 (broute) VCs, one half of the bandwidth is reserved for ATM connections. The bandwidth configured on the maximum of four output policy maps must not be greater than 500 Mbps.
Page 851 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS Table 25-1 Scheduler Class to Weight Calculation Scheduler Scheduler- Bandwidth on Class class Enhanced ATM Router Number Traffic Type Weight Module (Mbps) Default IP traffic VBR (RT and nRT) LSIPC —...
Page 852: Troubleshooting And Verifying The Vc Bundling With Ip And Atm Qos
240. This is because the weights maintained in the Cisco IOS are in the range 1-15, whereas the weights to be installed in the fabric are in the range 16-240. This means the weights are multiplied by 16 before being installed in the switch fabric.
Page 853 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS The following command verifies the input policy on the Gigabit Ethernet interface: Switch1# show epc ipqos database interface GigabitEthernet 11/0/0 input Input IP QoS Manager Database for GigabitEthernet11/0/0 ------------------------------------------------------ ACL Database Region Id : 0 Label Information for Label Id : 0...
Page 854 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE TAIL TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TAIL (IPC) Switch1# Also “show epc ipqos database int a9/0/0 output” can be used The following command verifies the allocated bandwidth after applying the output policy: Switch1# show epc ip-atm-qos interface atm 9/0/0 MMC Port: 68 MSC ID: 4...
Page 855 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS no logging buffered enable password lab username all spd headroom 1024 facility-alarm core-temperature major 60 facility-alarm core-temperature minor 50 redundancy main-cpu sync dynamic-info sync config startup sync config running sdm ipqos 512 sdm policy 0...
Page 856 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS random-detect buffer-group 0 max-probability 100 freeze-time 15 atm hierarchical-tunnel atm connection-traffic-table-row index 101 vbr-nrt pcr 81 scr0 81 mbs 0 atm connection-traffic-table-row index 300 cbr pcr 2310 packet-discard atm connection-traffic-table-row index 301 vbr-nrt pcr 2000 scr10 1640 packet-discard...
Page 857 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS no ip address interface ATM0 no ip address logging event subif-link-status interface Ethernet0 ip address 9.8.6.3 255.255.0.0 interface ATM9/0/0 description ARM2 at PH no ip address service-policy output arm2-ph interface ATM9/0/0.1 multipoint description Connection to BJ...
Page 858 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS interface GigabitEthernet11/0/1 no ip address router eigrp 100 network 1.0.0.0 network 3.0.0.0 network 6.0.0.0 network 8.0.0.0 network 11.0.0.0 network 33.0.0.0 network 34.0.0.0 network 50.0.0.0 auto-summary no eigrp log-neighbor-changes ip classless ip route 13.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 3.0.0.10...
Page 859 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS ip subnet-zero no voice hpi capture buffer no voice hpi capture destination interface FastEthernet0/0 description Connection to PH XPIF thru bridge ip address 50.0.0.2 255.0.0.0 duplex auto speed auto no cdp enable...
Page 860 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS no service pad service timestamps debug uptime service timestamps log uptime no service password-encryption hostname Switch2 boot config bootflash:cleanconfig boot bootldr bootflash:cat8540m-wp-mz.121-10.EY no logging buffered enable password lab username all spd headroom 1024...
Page 861 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS random-detect buffer-group 3 max-probability 100 freeze-time 15 class video bandwidth 175000 random-detect buffer-group 2 max-probability 100 freeze-time 15 class hipri bandwidth 100000 random-detect buffer-group 1 max-probability 100 freeze-time 15 class class-default bandwidth 25000...
Page 862 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS interface ATM0/1/1 no ip address interface ATM0/1/2 no ip address interface ATM0/1/3 no ip address interface ATM0 no ip address logging event subif-link-status interface Ethernet0 ip address 9.8.6.14 255.255.0.0 interface ATM9/0/0 description ARM2 at JM...
Page 863 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS interface ATM9/0/1.3 multipoint ip address 33.0.0.2 255.0.0.0 atm pvc 2 4000 pd on encap aal5snap inarp 1 interface ATM0/0/0.11 11 4000 interface GigabitEthernet11/0/0 description XPIF at JM ip address 51.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 service-policy input mark service-policy input ABC-signaling-mark...
Page 864 Chapter 25 Configuring ATM Router Module Interfaces Configuring VC Bundling with IP and ATM QoS bridge 1 route ip line con 0 exec-timeout 0 0 history size 100 line vty 0 4 exec-timeout 0 0 password lab login length 0 Switch2# ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 25-62...
Page 865: Configuring A Static Ip Route
Check the information in the first sections of the chapter to determine if it applies to your installation. Also, familiarize yourself with the Cisco IOS File System section, as this describes new features in this release. If you are an experienced IOS user, you can skip the third section.
Page 866: C H A P T E R 26 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, And Functional Images
Understanding the Cisco IOS File System This release of the ATM switch router system software uses the Cisco IFS (IOS File System). With IFS, you now access files on a storage device by specifying a filename and the file system containing the file.
Page 867: File Systems And Memory Devices
Chapter 26 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images Maintaining System Images and Configuration Files File Systems and Memory Devices File systems on the ATM switch router include read-only memory (RAM, or system), Flash memory (such as bootflash and the Flash PC cards in slot0 and slot1), and remote file systems (such as TFTP or rcp servers).
Page 868: Modifying, Downloading, And Maintaining Configuration Files
Chapter 26 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images Maintaining System Images and Configuration Files For detailed instructions on performing these tasks, refer to the Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide. Modifying, Downloading, and Maintaining Configuration Files The following are frequently performed tasks to maintain configuration files: Copy configuration files from the ATM switch router to a network server—You can copy files to a •...
Page 869: Additional File Transfer Features
Load the image from the Flash memory device to the hardware controller. Step 2 The command for loading functional images on the ATM switch router differs from that described in the Note Cisco IOS documentation. ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 26-5 OL-7396-01...
Page 870: Displaying The Functional Image Information (Catalyst 8540 Msr)
Switch# show functional-image-info slot 4 Details for cpu Image on slot: 4 Functional Version of the FPGA Image: 4.8 #Jtag-Distribution-Format-B #HardwareRequired: 100(3.0-19,4.0-19,5.0-19) #FunctionalVersion: 4.8 #Sections: 1 #Section1Format: MOTOROLA_EXORMAX Copyright (c) 1996-00 by cisco Systems, Inc. ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 26-6 OL-7396-01...
Page 871: Maintaining Functional Images (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 26 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images Maintaining Functional Images (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) All rights reserved. generated by: holliday Mon Mar 6 13:59:17 PST 2000 using: /vob/cougar/bin/jtag_script Version 1.13 config file: cpu.jcf Chain description: Part type Bits Config file 10k50 ../cidrFpga2/max/cidr_fpga.ttf...
Page 872: Loading Functional Images (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
The command for loading functional images on the ATM switch router differs from that described in the Note Cisco IOS documentation. To download a functional image from a Flash memory device to a hardware controller, use the following command in privileged EXEC mode:...
Page 873: Displaying The Functional Image Information (Catalyst 8510 Msr And Lightstream 1010)
Chapter 26 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images Maintaining Functional Images (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) Displaying the Functional Image Information (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) To display the functional image version in a hardware controller, use the following command in privileged EXEC mode: Command Purpose...
Page 874 Chapter 26 Managing Configuration Files, System Images, and Functional Images Maintaining Functional Images (Catalyst 8510 MSR and LightStream 1010) ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide 26-10 OL-7396-01...
Page 875: Adding A Higher Level Of Pnni Hierarchy
A P P E N D I X PNNI Migration Examples This appendix provides examples of how to migrate a flat network topology to a Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI) hierarchical network topology, and includes the following sections: Adding a Higher Level of PNNI Hierarchy, page A-1 •...
Page 876: Switch T1 Initial Configuration
Appendix Adding a Higher Level of PNNI Hierarchy You can convert the network to a single hierarchical PNNI routing domain by configuring a second level of hierarchy in each peer group and converting the IISP interface to a PNNI interface, as shown in Figure A-2.
Page 877: Switch T3 Initial Configuration
Appendix Adding a Higher Level of PNNI Hierarchy To display the reachability information, use the show atm route command. NewYork.BldB.T2# show atm route Codes: P - installing Protocol (S - Static, P - PNNI, R - Routing control), T - Type (I - Internal prefix, E - Exterior prefix, SE - Summary Exterior prefix, SI - Summary Internal prefix, ZE - Suppress Summary Exterior, ZI - Suppress Summary Internal) T Node/Port...
Page 878: Switch T4 Initial Configuration
Appendix Adding a Higher Level of PNNI Hierarchy Switch T4 Initial Configuration The initial configuration for switch SanFran.BldA.T4 follows: hostname SanFran.BldA.T4 atm address 47.0091.4455.6677.2233.1011.1266.0060.3e7b.2001.00 atm router pnni node 1 level 72 lowest redistribute atm-static interface ATM0/0/3 no ip address no atm auto-configuration atm iisp side user version 4.0 atm route 47.0091.4455.6677.11...
Page 879 Appendix Adding a Higher Level of PNNI Hierarchy SanFran.BldA.T4# configure terminal SanFran.BldA.T4(config)# atm router pnni SanFran.BldA.T4(config-atm-router)# node 2 level 56 SanFran.BldA.T4(config-pnni-node)# name SanFran SanFran.BldA.T4(config-pnni-node)# exit SanFran.BldA.T4(config-atm-router)# node 1 SanFran.BldA.T4(config-pnni-node)# parent 2 SanFran.BldA.T4(config-pnni-node)# election leadership-priority 45 SanFran.BldA.T4(config-pnni-node)# end SanFran.BldA.T4# Use the following commands to confirm the creation of the PNNI hierarchy: SanFran.BldA.T4# show atm pnni local-node PNNI node 1 is enabled and running Node name: SanFran.BldA.T4...
Page 880: Configuring The Link Between Switch T3 And Switch T4 For Pnni
Appendix Adding a Higher Level of PNNI Hierarchy Level 56 ancestor information: Parent LGN..: 2 LGN Name: SanFran LGN’s ID..: 56:72:47.009144556677223300000000.00603E7B2001.00 LGN’s Addr..: 47.009144556677223310111266.00603E7B2001.02 LGN’s PG ID.: 56:47.0091.4455.6677.0000.0000.0000 LGN PGL No..: Unelected or unknown LGN’s PGL ID: 0:0:00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00 Configuring the Link Between Switch T3 and Switch T4 for PNNI The following example shows how to configure the link between switch NewYorkBldB.T3 and SanFran.BldA.T4 for PNNI.
Page 881: Adding A New Lowest Level Of Pnni Hierarchy
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy The following example shows how to delete the old static route from switch T4: SanFran.BldA.T4# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. SanFran.BldA.T4(config)# no atm route 47.0091.4455.6677.11 atm0/0/3 SanFran.BldA.T4(config)# end SanFran.BldA.T4# The following example verifies that the old static route on switch T4 has been deleted:...
Page 882 If no renumbering is necessary and all ATM switch routers are peer group leader/logical group node Note (PGL/LGN)-capable (Cisco IOS Release 11.3T, WA4, or later releases), existing connections are not affected by the migration process. The existing connections remain active while you modify the PNNI configuration.
Page 883: Switch T2 Initial Configuration
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy Switch T1 Initial Configuration The initial configuration for switch NewYork BldB.T1 follows: hostname NewYork.BldB.T1 atm address 47.0091.4455.6677.1144.1011.1233.0060.3e7b.3a01.00 atm router pnni node 1 level 56 lowest redistribute atm-static The following example shows the output from the show atm route command for the switch: NewYork.BldB.T1# show atm route Codes: P - installing Protocol (S - Static, P - PNNI, R - Routing control), T - Type (I - Internal prefix, E - Exterior prefix, SE -...
Page 884: Switch T5 Initial Configuration
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy Switch T4 Initial Configuration The initial configuration for switch SanFran.BldA.T4 follows: hostname SanFran.BldA.T4 atm address 47.0091.4455.6677.2233.1011.1266.0060.3e7b.2001.00 atm router pnni node 1 level 56 lowest redistribute atm-static Switch T5 Initial Configuration The initial configuration for switch SanFran.BldA.T5 follows: hostname SanFran.BldA.T5 atm address 47.0091.4455.6677.2233.1011.1244.0060.3e7b.2401.00 atm router pnni...
Page 885 PNNI connectivity across the network. For this reason, we recommend that you upgrade all ATM switch routers to Cisco IOS Release 11.3T, WA4 or later, before configuring PNNI hierarchy. The following example shows how to move switch SanFran.BldA.T4 down into a new peer group: SanFran.BldA.T4# configure terminal...
Page 886: Moving Switch Sanfran.blda.t5 Down Into An Existing Peer Group
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy Moving Switch SanFran.BldA.T5 Down into an Existing Peer Group After you move the first ATM switch router down to form a new peer group, you can move the remaining ATM switch routers down into the peer group one by one. You should move the ATM switch routers down in an order that keeps the peer group contiguous.
Page 887: Restoring Auto-Summary On The Lgn Sanfran
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy SanFran.BldA.T5# show atm pnni hierarchy Locally configured parent nodes: Node Parent Index Level Index Local-node Status Node Name ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Enabled/ Running SanFran.BldA.T5 Enabled/ Not Running SanFran SanFran.BldA.T5# show atm pnni hierarchy network Summary of active parent LGNs in the routing domain: Node Level...
Page 888: Moving Switches T3, T1, And T2 Down Into A New Peer Group
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy The following examples show how to verify the configuration: SanFran.BldA.T4# show atm pnni summary Codes: Node - Node index advertising this summary Type - Summary type (INT - internal, EXT - exterior) - Suppressed flag (Y - Yes, N - No) Auto - Auto Summary flag (Y - Yes, N - No) - Advertised flag (Y - Yes, N - No)
Page 889 Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy The following example shows how to move switch NewYork.BldB.T1 down into a new peer group: NewYork.BldB.T1# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. NewYork.BldB.T1(config)# atm router pnni NewYork.BldB.T1(config-atm-router)# node 1 disable NewYork.BldB.T1(config-pnni-node)# node 1 level 72 enable NewYork.BldB.T1(config-pnni-node)# end...
Page 890: Restoring Autosummary On The Lgn Newyork
Appendix Adding a New Lowest Level of PNNI Hierarchy Lowest Level (72) information: Node No..: 1 Node Name: NewYork.BldB.T2 Node’s ID...: 72:160:47.009144556677114410111244.00603E5BBC01.00 Node’s Addr.: 47.009144556677114410111244.00603E5BBC01.01 Node’s PG ID: 72:47.0091.4455.6677.1144.0000.0000 PGL No..: 11 PGL Name: NewYork.BldB.T3 PGL ID..: 72:160:47.009144556677114410111255.00603E5BC401.00 Level 56 ancestor information: Parent LGN..: 13 LGN Name: NewYork LGN’s ID..:...
Page 891 BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol broadcast and unknown server connection admission control channel associated signalling constant bit rate Cisco Connection Online Cisco Distribution Protocol CDS3 channelized DS3 ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide OL-7396-01...
Page 892 CES-IWF circuit emulation services interworking function CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol committed information rate Cisco IFS Cisco IOS File System command-line interface cell loss priority cell loss ration class of service cyclic redundancy check campus switch router...
Page 893 Appendix Table B-1 List of Acronyms (continued) Acronym Definition International Code Designator ICMP International Control Message Protocol IMA Control Protocol identifier information element IISP Interim Interswitch Signaling Protocol ILMI Integrated Local Management Interface inverse multiplexing over ATM InARP Inverse ARP IPSec IP Security Protocol Internet Packet Exchange...
Page 894 Appendix Table B-1 List of Acronyms (continued) Acronym Definition NVRAM nonvolatile random-access memory operation, administration, and management optical carrier oversubscription factor OSPF Open Shortest Path First output virtual circuit Password Authentication Protocol peak cell rate packet discard pleisiochronous digital hierarchy peer group peer group leader physical interface...
Page 895 Appendix Table B-1 List of Acronyms (continued) Acronym Definition rate scheduler sustainable cell rate Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SGCP Simple Gateway Control Protocol ships in the night SNAP Subnetwork Access Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SONET Synchronous Optical Network SRTS synchronous residual time stamp Secure Shell Protocol SSRP...
Page 896 Appendix Table B-1 List of Acronyms (continued) Acronym Definition virtual path identifier virtual private network virtual routing and forwarding well-known weighted round-robin ATM Switch Router Software Configuration Guide OL-7396-01...
Page 897 I N D E X aal1 service structured command, ces 19-12 Symbols aal1 service unstructured command, ces 19-15, 19-45 # [for pound sign], in a prompt abbreviating commands * [for asterisk], as wildcard 14-4 > [for angle bracket], in a prompt configuring, example 9-34, 9-35 …...
Page 898 Index configuring, example 3-22 controlling data collection 15-9 overview copying data file with TFTP 3-19 15-12 access lists. See IP access lists data files 15-7 to 15-8 accounting. See ATM accounting environment (figure) 15-2 accounting file configuration mode. See ATM accounting global configuration 15-3 file configuration mode...
Page 899 Index wildcards in LANE templates 14-4 table ATM address groups atm e164 address command 17-7 configuring atm e164 auto-conversion command 10-8, 11-7 17-8 example 10-8, 11-7 atm e164 translation command 17-10 ATM addressing atm e164 translation-table command BOOTP server entering command mode 2-14 ILMI ATM end system addresses.
Page 900 Index tag switching 16-1 to 16-18 VCCs 7-3, 22-15 atm lecs-address command atm pvc encap aal5snap command 13-6, 25-20, 25-25, 25-26 Ethernet LANE clients atm pvp command 14-14 ILMI LECS addresses 10-3 connecting VP tunnels 16-11 atm lecs-address-default command hierarchical VP tunnels 14-7 7-85 atm link-distance command...
Page 901 Index configuring LANE clients, examples 25-11 to 25-16 redundant soft PVC destinations 7-59 configuring MPLS processing atm soft-vc command 16-29 7-21, 7-34 configuring tag switching point-to-multipoint soft PVC connections 16-31 7-65 IP multicast 25-28 atm soft-vp command 7-27, 7-35 LANE client atm sustained-cell-rate-margin-factor command 25-11 9-13...
Page 902 Index auto-summary command PNNI summary addresses 11-13 cablelength command 20-3 using (note) 11-13 calendar, configuring 4-14 available bit rate. See ABR calendar set command 4-14 call-agent command, sgcp 19-61 called-address-mask command 17-12 called-nsap-address command 17-12 background-routes-enable command 11-29 calling-nsap-address command 17-12 bert pattern command 21-4...
Page 903 Index T3/T1 time slot mapping (figure) 20-2 SVCs 19-44 to 19-48 cdv command, ces circuit ces aal1 clock adaptive command 19-6, 19-66, 19-70 19-12 CDVT ces aal1 clock command 19-4 configuring ATM default 9-31 ces aal1 clock synchronous command 19-15, 19-45 displaying configuration ces aal1 service command 9-31...
Page 904 (figure) circuit timeslots command, ces 19-44 19-21 ces svc command Cisco.com 19-45, 19-46, 19-50, 19-51 25-9 CES SVCs Cisco Discovery Protocol. See CDP configuring CiscoView 19-44 to 19-53 structured services about 19-48 to 19-52 2-17 unstructured services 19-44 to 19-47...
Page 905 Index transmit clocking source 3-12 command, show sgcp 19-57 clock source command, ces dsx1 command, show sgcp connection 19-5 19-60 clock synchronous command, ces aal1 command, show sgcp endpoint 19-15, 19-45 19-59 closed user groups. See CUGs command, ssh 4-21 collection-modes command command modes 15-7...
Page 906 Index testing 3-32 OC-3c 18-5 to 18-6 testing NVRAM OC-48c 3-33 18-11 to 18-12 configure command T1 ATM 18-15 to 18-17 entering command mode T1 IMA 21-3 to 21-5 configuring T1 trunk 18-15 to 18-17 ATM addresses terminal lines and modem support 4-1 to 4-2 BOOTP server troubleshooting connections...
Page 907 Index crypto key command 4-20 CES point-to-multipoint soft PVC connections 19-67, 19-71 diag online access command 3-21 configuring 9-10 diag online access freq command 3-21 configuring for Frame Relay to ATM interworking 20-21 diag online command 3-21 displaying configuration diag online oir command 9-12 3-21 Frame Relay to ATM interworking (table)
Page 908 Index configuring synchronization, example election leadership-priority command 11-21 synchronizing emulated LANs. See ELANs enable command ATM accounting 15-7 entering privileged EXEC mode endpoint command, show sgcp 19-59 E.164 end system identifier. See ESI addresses 17-4 to 17-11 end-to-end loopback, example autoconversion feature 17-5 Enhanced High System Availability.
Page 909 Index soft PVC, displaying 7-32 BOOTP server configuration file 3-4 to 3-5 soft PVC, example configuration files 7-31 26-4 extended MPLS ATM port copying ATM accounting files 16-23 15-12 extended TACACS functional images 26-5 to 26-9 description IOS file system 4-14 26-2 to 26-3 See also TACACS...
Page 910 Index frame-relay lmi-n392dce command 20-17 example 20-33 frame-relay lmi-n392dte command framing command 20-17 frame-relay lmi-n393dce command 622-Mbps interfaces 20-17 18-8 frame-relay lmi-n393dte command 20-17 CDS3 Frame Relay interfaces 20-3 frame-relay lmi-type command CE1 Frame Relay interfaces 20-15 20-8 frame-relay output-queue command DS3/E3 interfaces 20-22 18-14...
Page 911 Index structured services with shaped VP displaying configurations tunnel 19-23 to 19-27 overview 11-1 unstructured services 19-10 to 19-12 routing mode 11-2 to 11-4 description 19-7 static routes 3-18, 11-6 verifying ILMI for structured services 19-22 access filters 10-2 to 10-3 for unstructured services 19-13 ATM addresses...
Page 912 Index confirming interface deletion, example 21-11 restrictions 9-37 creating interface range command 21-6 to 21-7 deleting entering interface range command mode 21-11 to 21-12 deleting interfaces 21-10 interface range configuration mode displaying configuration, example description 21-9 grouping example (figure) table 21-2 ima test command interfaces...
Page 913 Index inverse multiplexing over ATM. See IMA configuring 13-13 IOS file system ip load-sharing per-packet command 26-2 13-13 ip access-group command IP multicast 12-11 IP access lists configuring 25-28 configuration, examples example 12-12 to 12-13 25-28 configuring ip multicast-routing command 12-9 to 12-14 25-28 description...
Page 914 Index enabling the configuration server 14-10 ESI template 14-4 jumbo frame configuration 25-17 ESI values derived from MAC address 14-4 jumbo frames, configuration 25-16 to 25-17 Ethernet clients 14-14 jumbo frames, definition 25-16 examples 14-17 to 14-32 jumbo frames, display 25-17 LECSs addresses...
Page 915 Index LAN emulation clients. See LECs MPLS terminology (table) 16-23 LAN emulation configuration servers. See LECSs table lookup process 16-26 LAN emulation servers. See LESs LGNs lane server-bus ethernet command 14-12 complex node representation 11-48 to 11-49 Layer 3 configuration example 11-24 to 11-28 ATM router modules configuring...
Page 916 Index login authentication command description 2-11 loopback command table 21-5 loopback command, ces dsx1 map-group command 19-5 13-7, 13-9, 25-18, 25-28 loopback interfaces map-list command bridging packet flooding 25-26 tag switching entering command mode 16-3 to 16-4 2-10 IP multicast 25-28 MPLS terminology (table) map lists, example...
Page 917 Index name server-atm-address command variables default ELANs 14-8 SNMP support redundant LECSs 15-20 14-15 min-age command 15-7 restricted-membership ELANs 14-10 mobile PNNI unrestricted-membership ELANs 14-8 configuring national reserve command 21-5 modem support NCDP 4-1 to 4-2 modes. See command modes configuring 3-13 monitoring.
Page 918 Index network management applications configuring entire switch router network management interface configuring interface level description configuring maximum connections, example 8-3, 8-4 network monitoring displaying configuration CiscoView fault management function (note) 2-17 to 2-20 network routing, configuring maximum configured connections 3-18 Network Time Protocol.
Page 919 Index configuring 9-21 to 9-22 permanent virtual channels. See PVCs displaying configuration permanent virtual path numbers. See PVP numbers 9-22 output policy PGLs IP QoS 22-12 configuration example 11-24 to 11-28 output queue maximum size configuring 11-16 to 11-24 displaying configuration node election leadership 9-18 11-20 to 11-22...
Page 920 Index peer group identifier 11-16 deleting 7-72 PGLs displaying 11-16 to 11-24 7-67 protocol parameters enabling or disabling 11-49 to 11-52 7-69 route selection 11-29 to 11-39, 11-54 to 11-57 example 7-66 scope mapping example (figure) 11-14 to 11-16 7-64 static routes guidelines 3-18, 11-6, 11-11 to 11-12...
Page 921 Index privilege command configuring (note) privileged EXEC mode configuring end points to PVP tunnels 7-86 description configuring soft, route optimization 7-29 security level configuring soft PVCs 7-19 table configuring terminating See also EXEC command mode deleting prompts example (figure) 7-14 angle bracket in examples 7-3, 7-9, 7-15...
Page 922 Index interface-level mapping 22-5 description 2-16 IP precedence table 22-3 queuing basis redundancy force-failover main-cpu command 22-3 qos mapping precedence command 22-4 redundancy manual-sync command quality of service. See QoS redundancy manual-sync counters command redundancy preferred-switch-card-slots command 5-12 redundancy prepare-for-cpu-removal command 5-10 redundant destination soft PVC and soft PVP configuring...
Page 923 Index framing overhead 9-41 background route computation 11-29 to 11-31, 11-54 to 11-55 functions 1-7, 9-2 explicit paths 11-36 to 11-39 hardware features 9-2 to 9-4 link selection 11-31 to 11-33, 11-54 to 11-56 interface overbooking 9-37 maximum administrative weight percentage 11-33, 11-56 precedence 11-34 to 11-35, 11-57...
Page 924 Index segment loopbacks configuration information 19-57 effect of ping command on unenabled (note) connections 19-60 enabling, example endpoints 19-59 ping of neighbor switch with operation 19-56 segment-target command overview 11-36 19-56 selection table shutdown 15-5 to 15-6 19-61 serial interfaces. See Frame Relay serial interfaces sgcp call-agent command 19-61 service categories...
Page 925 Index 12-bit VPI NNI configuration show atm pnni interface command 11-44 autoconfiguration show atm pnni local-node command 11-17, 11-40 E.164 addresses show atm pnni neighbor command 17-7 11-32, 11-55 hierarchical VP tunnel configuration 7-85 show atm pnni precedence command 11-35 IISP configuration show atm pnni resource-info command 11-47, 11-52...
Page 926 Index PVCs 7-87 show frame-relay connection-traffic-table command 20-22 soft PVC configuration 7-22 show frame-relay interface resource serial soft PVC explicit paths 7-32 command 20-23 troubleshooting interface configuration 18-17 show frame-relay lmi command 7-34, 20-15, 20-16, 20-18 VCCs 7-4, 7-7, 7-13 show functional-image-info command 26-6 show atm vc interface atm command...
Page 927 Index show network-clocks command 3-12 CUGs 17-15 to 17-19 show policy-map interface command diagnostics 22-22 17-11 to 17-15 show preferred-switch-card-slots command disabling 5-12 17-20 show privilege command E.164 addresses 17-4 to 17-11 show processes command IE forwarding 4-23 17-2 to 17-3 show protocols command multipoint-to-point funnel 4-23...
Page 928 Index connections 7-19 example 7-27 example example (figure) 7-21 7-26 explicit paths software features 7-31 to 7-33 point-to-multipoint 7-63 to 7-73 ATM addressing priority ATM internetworking services 7-34 redundant destinations managing and monitoring 7-55 to 7-63 route optimization resource management 7-29 structured services signalling and routing...
Page 929 Index E.164 addresses 17-6 switch fabric functionality PNNI switchover 11-6, 11-11 statistics command command 11-52 status command 17-13 command example structured command, ces aal1 service configuration 19-12 structured services description configuring synchronizing configurations CES SVCs synchronizing dynamic information 19-48 to 19-52 hard PVCs warning message 19-19 to 19-21...
Page 930 Index modem support 4-1 to 4-2 T3 trunks demultiplexing 4-10 20-2 passwords description 20-2 4-16 TACACS 4-14 privilege level access TACACS+ 4-15 scheduler attributes Tag Distribution Protocol, See TDP SNMP Tag Distribution Protocol. See TDP TACACS tag switching 4-14 TACACS+ CAC support 4-15 16-18...
Page 931 Index description 11-57 timer-rule command 7-52 timer rules based soft PVCs control channels configuring 16-8 to 16-9 7-50 to 7-54 description 16-23, 16-25 displaying 7-53 identifiers example 16-3 7-52 troubleshooting sessions overview 16-9 7-50 TDP control channels timer rules based soft PVPs between source and destination switches (figure) configuring 16-8...
Page 932 Index Ethernet connections 3-29 unstructured services interface configuration configuring 18-17 LANE components CES SVCs 14-16 19-44 to 19-48 TDP sessions 16-9 hard PVCs 19-10 to 19-12 network clocking 3-31 19-10 See also testing soft PVCs 19-13 to 19-17 TSCAMs overview 19-9 configuring verifying...
Page 933 Index VC bundling PVCs 7-8 to 7-10 configuration PVPs 25-30 to 25-34 7-10 to 7-13 configuration commands route optimization 25-31, 25-38 7-29 to 7-30 display 25-33 soft PVCs 7-19 to 7-24, 7-26 to 7-28, 20-32 to 20-39 examples soft PVPs 25-32 7-26 to 7-28 overview...
Page 934 Index deleting 7-88 displaying configuration 7-81, 16-11, 16-12 public network (figure) 7-79 signalling VPCI 7-87 weighted round-robin. See WRR 22-4 well-known VCs 7-74 wildcards in LANE address templates 14-4 configuring output scheduling 9-25 configuring precedence 22-4 configuring relative weight 16-15 description 16-13 effective bandwidth...

This manual is also suitable for:

Catalyst 8510 msr Lightstream 1010

Cisco Catalyst 8540 MSR Configuration Manual

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface

CHAPTER 3 Initially Configuring the ATM Switch Router

CHAPTER 4 Configuring System Management Functions

Chapter 5 Configuring Redundancy

Chapter 6 Configuring ATM Network Interfaces

CHAPTER 7 Configuring Virtual Connections

Chapter 8 Configuring Operation, Administration, and Maintenance

Chapter 9 Configuring Resource Management

Quick Links

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Cisco Catalyst 8540 MSR

Summary of Contents for Cisco Catalyst 8540 MSR